Home

User's Guide

1. Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 2 Go to step 3 Specify the paper size From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper and type from the tray menu to match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in tray the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Troubleshooting Action Step 4 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper Yes From the printer control panel set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray 338 No Go to step 5 Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Go to step 6 The problem is solved Step 6 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job
2. cscesccsecseeseeseees2O Finding the IP address of the printer cccccccccssssssseccceceecessesesseeseeeceecessesnsseeseecesesesssnssaeeeeeeeeseseeseeesees 20 Finding the IP address of the COMPUTEN cccccessssssceceeceececesseesessaeeceeceeceseesseseasausaeeeeeeeeeesseseseeeeesees 20 Accessing the Embedded Web Servel ssssssssssccceecesssesnsnseceeceeceecessseseaeeeeeseessussesssaeeseeseeseesessnsasensenea 20 Customizing the NOME SCLEONsisessccssvecseneseccsaessicvcvsessvaraarsncsesavawsnyueseddcandvonveusesceeasdaesvedssdevavantarhveasvenddcdasas 21 Understanding the different applications cccsscsscscccecceecssesssensnsseeceseeeecescesesesssessusaeeeeeeeesssseeeeeesees 21 Activating the home Screen applications ccccccccccssscssssesssseseeseeceessesesesseceueececeeeceseesesessssusaeeeeeseusnensa 22 Setting up Remote Operator Panel siss cccccsceiseatercossdesssevsvaecerdieaceawesiudesenscasdaceds canvass lags awavesutedaesasavecaeassecsd 25 Exporting and importing a CONFIQUrAtTION cccccccccceecesessesesssnsaeeeceeceececessesesesssnseaeeeeeceseesessesesnaeeeesees 26 Additional printer setup sssssssosessesosessecssssssossoseoseosessesosecseosessecssssesssse 27 Installing internal Option S rino naiaiae aeia aaa e aaa E Eae aaae aeaa EE 27 Installing hardware Option Ssss annan raa ire aa e a aea aiai 46 Attaching Cables vccisjsccnds cece ee oeieo EE E E R EE E EER 49 Setting U
3. gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start Push Button Method 2 Follow the instructions on the printer display Using the Personal Identification Number PIN method 1 From the printer control panel navigate to i gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start PIN Method 2 Copy the eight digit WPS PIN Additional printer setup 55 3 Open a Web browser and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field Notes e The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 4 Access the WPS settings For more information see the documentation that came with your access point 5 Enter the eight digit PIN and then save the setting Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server Before you begin make sure that e Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network e A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address fie
4. 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task e Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu Securing the printer 245 The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 3 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 4 Click Su
5. 7 Close the bottom ADF door 8 Straighten the edges of the original documents then load the documents into the ADF and then adjust the paper guide 9 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 1 Open the rear staple finisher door and then gently pull the paper out of the finisher Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 292 2 Close the staple finisher door 3 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 1 From the stapler bin firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 293 2 Open the stapler outer and inner doors 3 Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the holder out of the printer Clearing jams 294 4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard and then remove any loose staples EA gt x x x N 5 Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place Clearing jams 295 6 Slide the staples toward the metal bracket Note If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge then shake the cartridge downward to bring the staples near the metal bracket Warning Potential Damage
6. Do print irregularities still appear Contact customer support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative The problem is solved Print is too dark BS ABC DEF Action Step 1 a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel reduce the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Yes Go to step 2 No The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 2 a From the printer control panel set the paper type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Is the tray set to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded Yes Go to step 3 339 No Do one or more of the following e Specify the paper type texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type texture and weight specified in the tray settings Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Go to step 4 The problem is solved Step 4 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper Step 5 a Load paper from a fres
7. Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes 20 By using the configuration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Hibernate Mode This product is designed with an ultra low power operating mode called Hibernate mode When operating in Hibernate Mode all other systems and devices are powered down safely The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods e Using the Hibernate Timeout e Using the Schedule Power modes e Using the Sleep Hibernate button Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate ene
8. Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it e ifan optional tray is installed then remove it from the printer To remove the optional tray slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place e Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it e Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down e Before setting up the printer make sure there is adequate clearance around it Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports Safety information 8 This product
9. Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card Doing so may cause damage Additional printer setup 32 3 Align the notch 1 on the memory card with the ridge 2 on the connector 4 Push the memory card straight into the connector and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place 5 Reattach the controller board shield and then the controller board access cover Installing an optional card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Additional printer setup 33 Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 2 Unpack the optional card Warning Potential Damage Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins 1 on the card with the holes 2 on the controller board 1
10. e An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer e Active NIC is set to Auto To set this to Auto navigate to gt Network Ports gt Active NIC gt Auto gt Submit Note Make sure to turn off the printer then wait for at least five seconds and then turn the printer back on 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup 2 Select a wireless connection setup Search for networks Show available wireless connections Note This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs Enter a network name Manually type the SSID Note Make sure to type the correct SSID Wi Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup 3 Follow the instructions on the printer display Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup Before you begin make sure that e The access point wireless router is Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS certified or WPS compatible For more information see the documentation that came with your access point e A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter Using the Push Button Configuration method 1 From the printer control panel navigate to
11. 154 Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size The paper size value must be set Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure to Cassette for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus Use Manual Paper Size A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 155 To Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Manual Envelope Size 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Specify the paper type being manually loaded Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Manual for Manual Paper
12. Open the rear door of the staple finisher and then remove the jammed paper 5 Upper door and rear x page jam open upper and lower Open the rear door of the printer and the rear duplex duplex area rear door 231 234 area and then remove the jammed paper 6 Upper rear door x page jam open upper rear Open the upper rear door of the printer and then door 202 remove the jammed paper 7 Mailbox x page jam open mailbox rear Open the rear door of the mailbox and then remove door Leave paper in bin 4yy xx the jammed paper Clearing jams foe 10 11 Area name Multipurpose feeder Inside the printer Standard bin Automatic document feeder ADF Printer control panel message x page jam clear manual feeder 250 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 x page jam open automatic feeder top cover 28y xx 273 What to do Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and then remove the jammed paper Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit and then remove the jammed paper Remove all paper from the standard bin and then remove the jammed paper Remove all paper from the ADF tray and then remove the jammed paper x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 CAUTION HOT SURFACE The
13. Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs Note Auto is the factory default setting Enable two sided printing for incoming fax jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Separator Sheets Off Before Job After Job Separator Sheet Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder 204 To Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Output Bin Specify a bin for received faxes Standard Bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x Fax Footer Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Max Speed Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received 2400 Note 33600 is the factory default setting 4800 9600 14400 33600 Fax Forwarding Print Print and Forward Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Note Print is the factory default setting Forward Forward to Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded Fax Notes E mail FTP e Fax is the factory default setting LDSS e This menu is available only
14. Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF On Off TIFF Compression LZW JPEG Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files Specify whether to print the transmission log Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Note On is the factory default setting Note LZW is the factory default setting Note Print log is the factory default setting Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specify the bin for FTP logs Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting e Bin x only appears when at least one optional bin is installed FTP bit Depth Enable the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when ee 1 bit Color is set to Off 8 bit Note 8 bit is the factory default setting File
15. Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Check the ring count delay settings a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly b Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup c Inthe Rings to Answer field enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers d Click Submit Can you receive faxes eee en e e Troubleshooting Step 3 Replace the toner cartridge For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Can you receive faxes Fax and e mail functions are not set up Notes Before you troubleshoot check if the fax cables are connected e The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e mail Action a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Run initial setup gt Yes gt Submit b Turn off the printer and then turn it back on The Select your language screen appears on the printer display Select a language and then touch ZS Select a country or region and then touch Next Select a time zone and then touch Next gt 0 Aaa Select Fax and E mail and then
16. 40 Additional printer setup 41 To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket and then remove the bracket b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP and then press the printer hard disk down until the standoffs are in place Installation warning Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 42 To install a printer hard disk directly on the controller board cage a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage and then press the printer hard disk down until the standoffs are in place Installation warning Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage Additional printer setup b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded 43 Additional printer setup 44 Removing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flat h
17. Is the printer IP address correct The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 Contact customer support Type the correct printer IP address inthe address field of your Web browser Note Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server Step 2 Check if the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Go to step 3 Turn on the printer Troubleshooting 363 Action Yes No Step 3 Go to step 4 Contact your system Check if the network connection is working support person Is the network connection working Step 4 Go to step 5 Tighten the cable Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure connection For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure Step 5 Go to step 6 Contact your system Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers support person Note Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server Are the Web proxy servers disabled Step 6 The problem is solved Contact customer Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address support in the address field Did the Embedded Web Server open Contacting customer support
18. Note The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function and not from any other application 10 USB Drive View select print scan or e mail photos and documents from a flash drive Note This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer 11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs 12 Status Supplies Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing e Access the messages screen for more information on the message and how to clear it 13 14 Tips Search Held Jobs Features Feature Menu trail line Example Menus gt Settings gt Copy Settings gt Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu Number of Copies Open a context sensitive Help dialog Search for one or more of the following items e User name for held or confidential print jobs Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs Profile names Bookmark container or print job names USB container or print job names for supported file types Description A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the number of copies is set and saved then the selection
19. Product name Lexmark XM7155 XM7163 and XM7170 Machine type 7463 Model s 496 696 896 Edition notice August 2014 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly de
20. Using the printer control panel 1 2 3 Use the Display e View the printer status and messages Set up and operate the printer Home button Go to the home screen Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode Touch the screen or press any hard button e Open a door or cover e Send a print job from the computer e Perform a power on reset POR with the main power switch Attach a device to the USB port on the printer Keypad Enter numbers letters or symbols Start button Start a job depending on which mode is selected Clear all Reset button Reset the default settings of a function such as copying faxing or scanning Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity Indicator light Check the status of the printer Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Printer status Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Understanding the printer control panel 16 Printer status Blinking red The printer requires user intervention Sleep button light Off Solid amber Printer status The printer is off idle or in Ready state T
21. 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Scale area touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1 Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content 4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copyin
22. C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 01 in x lt B5 Envelope Other Envelope 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 in 98 x 162 mm 3 9 x 6 4 in to 176 x 250 mm 6 9 x 9 8 in v x lt x lt KISI SS a v 1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel then you may select common paper sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size Type menu If the paper size is not available then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing For more information contact customer support 2 Paper is supported in long edge orientation 3 Universal is supported in ADF only if the width is from 76 mm 3 in to 216 mm 8 5 in and the length is from 127 mm 5 in to 356 mm 14 in Paper and specialty media guide 90 Paper types and weights supported by the printer The printer engine supports 60 176 g m2 16 47 Ib paper weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed 550 sheet tray 2100 sheet Multipurpose Scanner glass tray feeder Duplex Paper type Paper Card Stock X Plain Envelope X Rough Envelope Paper Labels Pharmacy Labels Transparencies V X V Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on
23. DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Screen Brightness 20 100 Format the date Note MM DD YYVYY is the U S factory default setting DD MM YYYY is the International factory default setting Format the time Note 12 hour A M P M is the factory default setting Specify the brightness of the display Note 100 is the factory default setting One Page Copy Off On Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Note Off is the factory default setting Output Lighting Normal Standby Mode Off Dim Bright Error Lighting On Off Set the output lighting for the standard bin Notes Dim is the factory default setting if Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper Bright is the factory default setting if Eco Mode is Off or set to Paper Enable the indicator light to blink red when the printer encounters an error Note On is the factory default setting 190 Understanding the printer menus Use Audio Feedback Button Feedback On Off Volume 1 10 aI Specify the audio volume for the buttons Notes On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback e 5 is the factory default setting for Volume Tactile Touchscreen Feedback On Off Enable touch screen sensation feedback Note On is the factory default setting Show Bookmarks Yes No Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note
24. DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing SMTP Setup menu Use Ae Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port SMTP Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to 5 30 send an e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Use SSL Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the Disabled SMTP server Negotiate Notes Required Disabled is the factory default setting e When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used SMTP Server Authentication Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail No authentication required privileges Login Plain Note No authentication required is the factory default setting CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 eee Understanding the printer menus Use Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID amp Password Use S
25. DST Start Day DST Start Month DST Start Time DST End Week DST End Day DST End Month DST End Time DST Offset Enable the user to set up the time zone Enable NTP On Off Enable Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Note On is the factory default setting NTP Server Enable Authentication On Off a ee View the NTP server address Change the authentication setting to On or Off Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Settings menu General Settings menu Use Display Language English Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portugues Suomi Russian Polski Greek Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Show Supply Estimates Show estimates Do not show estimates 186 eC Set the language of the text appearing on the display Note Not all languages are available for all models You may need to install a special hardware for some languages View the estimates of the supplies on the control panel Embedded Web Server menu settings and device statistics reports Note Show estimates is the factory default setting Eco Mode Off Energy Energy Paper Paper ADF Loaded Beep Enabled Disabled ADF Multi feed Sensor On Off Quiet Mode Off On Minimize the use of energy paper or specialty media Note Off is the factor
26. Do not tap the cartridge on a hard surface This could damage the cartridge 7 Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place 8 Close the stapler door 9 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 296 Troubleshooting Understanding the printer messages Cartridge low 88 xy You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Cartridge nearly low 88 xy If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Cartridge very low x estimated pages remain 88 xy You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Change paper source to custom string load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Cancel the print job Change paper source to custom type name load orientation Try one or more of
27. Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 301 Insert hole punch box 301 Insert staple cartridge 301 Insert Tray x 301 Install bin x 301 Install duplex 302 Install Tray x 302 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 302 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 302 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 303 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 303 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 303 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 303 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 303 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 303 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 304 Load Manual Feeder with custom string paper orientation 304 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name paper orientation 304 Load Manual Feeder with paper size paper orientation 304 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 304 Load staples 305 Maintenance kit low 80 xy 305 Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy 305 Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy 305 Memory full 38 305 Memory full cannot print faxes 305 Memory full cannot send faxes 306 Network x software error 54 306 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 306 Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 33 x
28. When you contact customer support you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the printer display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label at the back of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem Visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com and then select one of the following p Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals support documentation drivers and other downloads to help you solve common problems E mail You can send an e mail to the Lexmark team describing your problem A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems install updates or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product Telephone support is also available In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit http support lexmark com Notices 364 Notices Product information
29. Yes is the factory default setting When Yes is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Allow Background Removal On Off Allow Custom Job Scans On Off Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Specify whether image background removal is allowed Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image is removed Scan multiple jobs to one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected then the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes e Job level is the factory default setting e If Job level is selected then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam e If Page level is selected then rescan from the jammed page forward Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 is the factory default setting Contact Name Location Specify a contact name Note The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server Specify the location Note The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server Understanding the printer menus Use Alarms Alarm Control Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm Hole Punch Alarm 191 To Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention For each alarm type select from the following options off Single Continuous Notes e Single i
30. supply appears on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e mail about the status of the supply The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached Continuable Stop The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing Non Continuable Stopt The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing t The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled 2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Managing the printer 267 Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 56 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All Ul Settings option For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 244 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads sto
31. touch Cancel Job Canceling appears on the display When the job is canceled the Copy screen appears Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Understanding the copy options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document Touch the paper size that matches the original document e To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width touch Mixed Sizes To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document touch Auto Size Sense Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed e Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded e Ifthe settings for Copy from and Copy to are different then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference Copying 110 e Ifthe paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays then touch Manual Feeder and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder e When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the paper size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in
32. x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Sides Duplex Off Long Edge Short Edge 220 To Specify the size of the original document Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two sided scanning Note Off is the factory default setting JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality Note Best for content is the factory default setting Text Default 5 90 Text Photo Default 5 90 Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and quality Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality Note 50 is the factory default setting Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page Note On is the factory default setting Scan Bit Depth 1 bit 8 bit Enable the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 b
33. 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted Printing 95 e If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears on the printer display After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any wireless network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data can occur 2 From the printer control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document 4 Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed and then touch Print Notes e Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing e If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive Supported flash drives and file types Notes e High speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported USB flash drives must support t
34. 141 SCAM E E T avenectaueba cee setae ee Lae Using SGanitON CtWOMKssieccdeSeas Ssscsaedebevedelanaedenchadsvcelssuedua donsacedebedbapasectds danadeucoaes se vanwaanaedsQescumiaacedeatage a 144 SCANNING to an FT P addreSS nerca a T E E 850005 A E A A a EAEE 144 Scanning to a computer or flash Arive c csccsssccccccecescecessssesesnsnsececsececeeceseecessesseauaususaeaeeseeeeeeesseesess 146 Understanding the Scan Options cccccssesssssssnscececeecescecesuseesnsnseseececeeceeeeeesssuauseeaeeseseeessesesseeseseeeeess 148 Understanding the printer MeNuG cssscssscsssccsscssccsscssccsscesccssssssssssee LDL MG MUSSIIS tisciek csien E E A EE tcevemndusses ced cdunen tang A E N S 151 Paper memene E A ETE etedscnsaasts elvinbeedian bes E ade edee id eee 152 REPOFtSiMEN Ut A P E aaa eae Asi T egal AA Aiea hea 165 NOGtWOrk POrts HMOAU doe cc dsc 25255 ace ei E EE E dates Saduscdwaniadeadsdpovecesaneddeudsdhocsshee Suede long Soasedsees 166 Security MENU sre na on a E cetbandtnces T LOE ee AT eee RE eee E hed 179 SEUES EN eseri i ern e ETEA EATA E AEA Eee ENERE OELE OER EA sana T sees atone ee 186 Saving money and the environment sssssssessesssssssosecssossesscsesseesessesse LO Saving PAPEL ANC tonen orn re onneni raneren orinar e re at eanan rE Teenan En TANET E a Taai Ee 238 Savine ene E aana a a ds head ddd ead alin Aa Seta eis 239 REG i a e E E E EA E E E E EET A 241 Securing the printer essssssssssse
35. 161 customer support contacting 363 D darkness copy options 110 e mail options 117 fax options 141 scan options 149 date and time fax setting 135 daylight saving time setting 135 Default Source menu 152 Defective flash detected 51 298 delayed send fax options 142 device and network settings information erasing 244 different paper sizes copying 103 Digital Subscriber Line DSL fax setup 125 digital telephone service fax setup 128 directory list printing 98 Disk full 62 298 Disk full scan job canceled 299 Disk must be formatted for use in this device 299 disk wiping 244 display troubleshooting printer display is blank 317 display printer control panel 15 adjusting brightness 240 Index disposing of printer hard disk 243 distinctive ring service fax connecting to 134 documents printing from Macintosh 93 from Windows 93 DSL filter 125 duplexing 104 E Eco Mode setting 239 Edit Security Setups menu 179 embedded solutions information erasing 244 Embedded Web Server accessing 20 adjusting brightness 240 administrator settings 265 checking the status of parts 251 checking the status of supplies 251 creating a fax destination shortcut 137 creating an FTP shortcut 144 creating e mail shortcuts 113 initial fax setup 120 modifying confidential print settings 98 networking settings 265 problem accessing 362 scanning to a computer using 147 setting up e mail alerts 265 Embedded Web Server A
36. 2 4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration Additional printer setup 34 Warning Potential Damage Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board Note The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board 5 Close the controller board access door Note When the printer software and any hardware options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 51 Installing an Internal Solutions Port The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For mor
37. 337 print is too dark 338 Index print is too light 340 printer is printing solid black pages 336 repeating defects appear on prints 341 shadow images appear on prints 342 skewed print 342 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 343 streaked vertical lines 344 toner fog or background shading appears on prints 345 toner rubs off 346 toner specks appear on prints 346 transparency print quality is poor 347 uneven print density 347 white streaks on a page 347 troubleshooting printer options internal option is not detected 318 internal print server 318 Internal Solutions Port 319 tray problems 319 USB parallel interface card 320 troubleshooting printing printing slows down 326 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 358 partial document or photo scans 358 scan job was not successful 359 scanner unit does not close 351 360 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 360 U understanding the home screen buttons andicons 16 uneven print density 347 Unformatted flash detected 53 315 Universal paper size setting 58 Universal Setup menu 163 unlinking trays 81 82 Unsupported camera mode unplug camera and change mode 315 Unsupported option in slot x 55 315 393 Unsupported USB hub please wireless setup wizard remove 299 using 54 USB port 49 USB port x disabled 56 315 X USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 320 using a shortcut number scanning to an FTP address 145 using F
38. 5 Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network 6 Internal Solutions Port ISP or Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk printer hard disk slot Note If the printer has support for wireless connection then the wireless antenna is attached here 7 USB port Attach an optional wireless network adapter Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any wireless network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing Loss of data or a malfunction can occur Additional printer setup Organizing cables Attach the Ethernet cable and power cord and then neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer I she Setting up the printer software Installing the printer 1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package 2 Run the installer and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 3 For Macintosh users add the printer Note Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu Adding available options in the print driver For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Run gt type control printers gt OK Additional printer setup 52 In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or click Start and then click Run b Type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Select the printer you want to update and then do either of the following e For Windows 7 or la
39. 8 Connect the printer to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector e Try calling the fax number to make sure that it is working properly e If the telephone line is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax e If you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to check if you hear a dial tone Troubleshooting Action Step 8 Temporarily disconnect other equipment such as answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters between the printer and the telephone line and then try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Yes The problem is solved 354 No Go to step 9 Step 9 a Temporarily disable call waiting Contact your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Step 10 a Temporarily disable voice mail service For more information contact your telephone company Note If you want to use both voice mail and the printer then consider adding a second telephone line for the printer b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 10 Go to step 11 Step 11 Scan the original document one page at a time a Dial the fax number b Scan the documen
40. Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Sample Copy Create a sample copy of the original document off Notes On e Offis the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Understanding the printer menus 198 Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line General Fax Settings Use To Restore Factory Defaults Restore the factory defaults of all fax settings Optimize Fax Compatibility Optimize fax compatibility with other fax machines Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax Fax ID Specify how the fax is identified Fax Name Note Fax Number is the factory default setting Fax Number Enable Manual Fax Set the printer to fax manually which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Press 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to this setting Memory Use Define the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs All receive Note Equal is the factory default setting Mostly receive Equal Mostly send All send Cancel Faxes Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed Allow Note A
41. Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 213 To Enable an equal balance of colors in the output Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Negative Image Off On Shadow Detail 4to4 ADF Multi feed Sensor On Off Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once Note On is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge N Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default Ato4 while warm values generate a redder output
42. E a a aei 109 Understanding the copy Options cccccessssssssscceceeceecesessseeaeeececesescesesusaeseecesesesesseessueeeeeeseseeeeeeeeess 109 e aT E E E E a Le Setting Up the printer to e MAiA a a a aeaa E Ea a Eaa aaae An Aaa de iaia 112 Creating a e mail SHOCUt a t cess sec cusceaee ca ba cavesevasauteises cosavvsbauisk Ene OERA EEE TEASEE aani EEEa 113 E mailing a document z seee e a a a a a a a saeanidecieseste 114 Customizing e mail Setting Sinus s a a aN EA NT A A ESEE 115 Ca c eling ane Mailso ri bau aeae a r eae a aana e a aa Ala EEr aSa Da a kraniet 116 Understanding the e mail OPtions c ccccccccccccccccsssssesssnsnsaeacececececesceseesesesesaueaeseeseseecesesssesesseeeeeeeseess 116 FAMINE E E E A ET EE LLG Setting Up the printer to faX ccccssssssscceceecescssessssueseceeceecesessseusaeececesceseeeessaseseeeseessesessauesesesssnseaeess 119 Contents 4 Sending aiK a a E a A ead dian dese a e iste a a TE aa 135 Creating SHOMCUUS ana e r aaraa E a aa a a Eaa E E E anaa E Aas 137 CUSTOMIZING fax setting Sron eaa a a a a as E a e a a a segs cee 138 Canceling an outgoing TAX ausside monne e A Na AEE EI E od Ua E ENE AT ode e ANO 140 Holding and forwarding faxes ccccccesesssesssessneceeeceececescesuseesnsaeeaeeeeeeeceeseesessensaeeaeeseseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeesss 140 Understanding the fax Options ccccssssscscceceeccssesssseccceccescessesseseeeseeeceseeeseusaueesceseseseseaaueaeeeeesseseseeeess
43. Name Enter a base file name Understanding the printer menus Use Custom Job Scanning On Off 217 To Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Scan Preview On Off Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal 4to4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image Off On Negative Image Off On ee Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory defaul
44. Options Select a copy option Home Go to the home screen Increase Select a higher value Decrease Select a lower value Open a context sensitive Help dialog Other touch screen buttons Accept Save a setting Understanding the printer control panel Cancel e Cancel an action or a selection Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes Reset Reset values on the screen Setting up and using the home screen applications 20 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes e Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active applications e There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase For more information go to www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Finding the IP address of the printer Note Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server You can find the printer IP address From the top left corner of the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Finding the IP address of the computer For Windows users 1 Inthe Run dialog box type cmd to open the command prompt 2 Type
45. Photo Film The original document is a photo from film e Press The original document was printed using a printing press Delayed Send This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed Faxing 143 Using the advanced options Select from the following settings Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you fax the document Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log Multifeed Sensor This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time and then shows an error message Note This option is supported only in select printer models Scanning 144 Scanning Using Scan to Network Scan to Network lets yo
46. Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone cable into the wall jack 4 Ifyou still do not hear a dial tone then plug the telephone cable into a different wall jack 5 If you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Yes The problem is solved 353 No Go to step 6 Step 6 Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used e If you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider e Ifyou are using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider e If you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists then consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector Step 7 Check for a dial tone Did you hear a dial tone Go to step 7 Go to step
47. Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States Notices 375 relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Modular component notice This product may contain the following modular co
48. Server setup If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator Try either of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax setup If the message appears again after completing the setup then contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax setup If the message appears again after completing the setup then contact your system support person Imaging unit low 84 xy You may need to order a replacement imaging unit If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Imaging unit very low x estimated pages remain 84 xy You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Incompatible output bin x 59 Try one or more of the following Remove the indicated bin From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the m
49. The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Holding Faxes 3 From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following e Off e Always On e Manual e Scheduled 4 Ifyou selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes Faxing 141 c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 5 Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a f
50. The original document was printed using a color laser printer Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer Magazine The original document is from a magazine Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Photo Film The original document is a photo from film Press The original document was printed using a printing press Save As Shortcut This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name Note Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document Send As This option lets you set the output type for the scan image Select one of the following PDF Use this to create a single file with multiple pages This can be sent as a secured or compressed file TIFF Use this to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document XPS Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages RTF Use this to create a file in editable format TXT Use this to create an ASCII t
51. Type to appear as a menu Specify the envelope size being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the U S factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting Manual Envelope Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type x Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Specify the envelope type being manually loaded Note Envelope is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 156 Default ADF Media Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom x Specify the media type being loaded in the ADF Note Plain Paper is the factory default setting Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Substitute Size menu Use Substitute Size Off Statement A5 Letter A4 All Listed Paper Texture menu Plain Texture Smooth Normal Rough Card Stock Texture Smooth Normal Rough To Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes e All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed e Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed e Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change Paper appearing Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a
52. Use ae Login Restrictions Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control Login failures panel before all users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time e Login failures specifies the number of failed logi t f Parel Login Timeout g p umber of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts 3 attempts is the factory Remote Login Timeout default setting e Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes S minutes is the factory default setting e Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes S minutes is the factory default setting 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home screen before automatically logging off the user Settings range from 1 to 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging off the user Settings range from 1 to 120 minutes 10 minutes is the factory default setting Security Reset Jumper Adjust the security settings No Effect Access controls No Security Notes R
53. a fax job 140 changing resolution 138 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 135 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 137 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 138 distinctive ring service 134 fax setup 120 forwarding faxes 141 holding faxes 140 making a fax lighter or darker 139 sending a fax at a scheduled time 137 sending using the printer control panel 135 setting the date and time 135 setting the fax number 134 setting the outgoing fax name 134 viewing a fax log 139 FCC notices 366 371 375 file name scan options 148 finding more information about the printer 9 finding printer IP address 20 finisher supported paper types and weights 90 supported sizes 90 Finishing menu 226 firmware card 27 flash drive printing from 94 Flash Drive menu 218 flash drives supported file types 95 font sample list printing 98 Forms and Favorites setting up 22 forwarding faxes 141 FTP FTP options 148 FTP address creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 145 FTP address scanning to using a shortcut number 145 using the printer control panel 145 FTP options advanced options 150 FTP 148 FTP Settings menu 214 G General Settings menu 186 green settings Eco Mode 239 Hibernate mode 240 Quiet Mode 239 H hardware options adding print driver 51 held jobs 96 printing from a Macintosh computer 97 printing from Windows 97 Help menu 236 Hibernate mode using 240 hiding icons
54. and scanner working XR The problem is solved Contact customer support Troubleshooting Solving home screen application problems An application error has occurred Action Step 1 Check the system log for relevant details a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer home screen e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 b Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt System tab gt Log c From the Filter menu select an application status d From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit Does an error message appear in the log Yes Go to step 2 362 Contact customer support Step 2 Resolve the error Is the application working now Embedded Web Server does not open Action Step 1 Make sure the printer IP address is correct View the printer IP address From the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123
55. and then turn the printer back on Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display The problem is solved Turn off the printer and then contact customer support p Troubleshooting Hardware and internal option problems Cannot detect internal option Action Step 1 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn on the printer Does the internal option operate correctly Yes The problem is solved 318 Go to step 2 Print a menu settings page and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the internal Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board option to the controller a Turnoffthe printer using the power switch and then unplug the power paara cord from the electrical outlet b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board c Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board Step 3 Go to step 4 Reinstall the internal option Step 4 a Check if the internal option is selected It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more infor
56. and using the printer control panel Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Scanning 145 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Navigate to Settings gt Other Settings area gt Manage Shortcuts gt FTP Shortcut Setup 3 Enter the appropriate information Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password then contact your system support person 4 Enter a shortcut number Note If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to oO FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt gt type a name for the shortcut gt Done 2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK Notes Ifthe name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information f you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Scanning to an FTP address You can use the printer to send scanned documents to an FTP address in a number of ways You can type the FTP address use a shortc
57. appear on prints Step 2 a Replace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal to either of the following e 94 25 mm 3 71 in e 95 2 mm 3 75 in b Resend the print job Contact customer support Do repeating defects still appear on prints The problem is solved Troubleshooting 342 Shadow images appear on prints Leading edge BS ABCD ABCD Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Load paper with the Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray correct paper type and weight in the tray Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper loaded in the tray to menu to match the paper loaded in the tray match the paper type and weight specified in Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded the aysertlnes Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do shadow images still appear on prints Step 4 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Do shadow images still appear on prints XR Skewed print Troubleshooting 343 Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step
58. are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Use To Wiping Mode Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files Auto Automatic Method Mark all disk space used by a previous print job This method does not permit the file Single pass system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Multiple pass Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting e Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time e Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass method r ha Security Audit Log menu Use aK Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log Notes To export the log from the printer control panel attach a flash drive to the printer e To export the log from the Embedded Web Server download the log to a computer Ni O a __ Ny t _ Tt W u u _ _ _ _ N _ _ _ y y N _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ nyzxzxz __ N _ _ tzw _ _ _ _ _ ___ ________ Understanding the printer menus Use Delete Log Yes No Configure Log Enable Audit Yes No Enable Remote Syslog No Yes Remote Syslog Server 256 character
59. b Remove the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems c Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge d Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Troubleshooting 333 Action Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Horizontal voids appear on prints Leading edge DLA SRA 5 Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on p
60. close 351 360 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 360 scanner Automatic document feeder ADF 14 functions 13 scanner glass 14 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 312 Scanner disabled by admin 840 01 312 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 312 scanner glass cleaning 248 copying using 101 Scanner jam open and close automatic feeder top cover 2yy xx 312 Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 2yy xx 312 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx 312 Scanner maintenance required soon use ADF Kit 80 312 scanning from a flash drive 148 quick copy 100 to a computer using the Embedded Web Server 147 to an FTP address 145 146 scanning to acomputer 147 using the Embedded Web Server 147 scanning to a flash drive 148 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 144 using a shortcut number 145 using the address book 146 using the printer control panel 145 scanning to network destinations 144 security modifying confidential print settings 98 Security Audit Log menu 182 security settings information erasing 244 security Web page where to find 246 selecting a location for the printer 10 selecting paper 86 Send As e mail options 117 scan options 149 sending a fax using the computer 136 sending a fax using the printer control panel 135 sending an e mail using the printer control panel 114 sending fax using sh
61. contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission fax name identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and fax number telephone number of the sending fax machine business other entity or individual For more information see Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment on page 371 To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear 1 When the Fax Name screen appears do the following a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes b Enter the fax name and then touch Submit 2 When the Fax Number screen appears enter the fax number and then touch Submit Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123
62. default setting e This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed Specify whether prints have punched holes Notes e Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Hole Punch Mode 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints Notes 3 holes is the U S factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Understanding the printer menus 223 Duplex Binding Define binding for two sided pages in relation to page orientation Long Edge Short Edge Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting It assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting Portrait Paper Saver Specify that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper off Notes 2 Up 3 Up e Off is the factory default setting 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Border Print a border on each page image N
63. e Cancel current print job e Install additional printer memory Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer The printer firmware has been updated e The tray for the print job has been removed e The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Defective flash detected 51 Try one or more of the following Replace the defective flash memory card From the printer control panel touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing e Cancel the current print job Disk full 62 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity Troubleshooting 299 Disk full scan job canceled Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk Install a hard disk with higher capacity Disk must be formatted for use in this device From the printer control panel touch Format disk
64. expected 328 tray linking does not work 329 unexpected page breaks occur 329 printer 51 basic model 12 fully configured 12 minimum clearances 10 moving 10 263 264 selecting a location 10 shipping 264 printer configurations 12 printer control panel 15 adjusting brightness 240 factory defaults restoring 267 indicator light 15 Sleep button light 15 Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete 307 printer hard disk disposing of 243 encrypting 245 installing 39 removing 44 wiping 244 printer hard disk encryption 245 printer hard disk memory erasing 244 printer information where to find 9 printer IP address finding 20 printer is printing blank pages 335 printer messages x page jam open upper rear door 202 277 x page jam clear manual feeder 250 286 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 273 388 x page jam open automatic feeder top cover 28y xx 290 x page jam open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 4yy xx 287 x page jam open tray x 24x 285 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 279 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 4yy xx 291 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 292 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 283 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 284 Cartridge low 88 xy 296 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 296 Cartridge very l
65. from the On computer Off Notes Parallel Mode 2 On Off Mac Binary PS On e Off is the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Serial x menu Notes Off Auto e Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol e On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address Set the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Set the netmask information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Note This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed Understanding the printer menus 176 Use To PCL SmartSwitch Set
66. going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Turn off the printer using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Additional printer setup 47 2 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packing material 3 Pull out the tray completely from the base 4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray 5 Insert the tray into the base 6 Place the tray near the printer 7 Align the optional tray with the caster base Note Make sure to lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer Additional printer setup 48 8 Align the printer with the tray and then slowly lower the printer into place Note Optional trays lock together when stacked 9 Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Additional printer setup 49 Note When the printer software and any optional trays are installed you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print
67. in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The printer IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Multi Send 3 From the Profiles section click Add and then customize the settings Notes e See the mouse over help beside each field for a description of the setting e If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination then make sure the location settings of the destination are correct Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Multi Send on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Scan to Network Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Setting up and using the home screen applications 25 Use To Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations Notes alts The printer must have permission to write to the destinations From the computer where the destination is specified use sharing secur
68. inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door Clearing jams 274 2 Lift the green handle and then pull out the toner cartridge from the printer 3 Place the toner cartridge aside 4 Lift the green handle and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer 5 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat smooth surface Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs Clearing jams 275 6 Pull the jammed paper gently to the right and then remove it from the printer Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Warning Potential Damage The jammed paper may be covered with toner which can stain garments and skin 7 Install the imaging unit Note Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide Clearing jams 276 8 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer and then push the green handle back into place Notes e Align the arrows on the guides of the toner cartridge with the arrows in the printer e Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in Clearing jams 9 Close the multipurpose feeder
69. ipconfig and then look for the IP address For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu select Network 2 Select your connection type and then click Advanced gt TCP IP 3 Look for the IP address Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Setting up and using the home screen applications 21 3 Press Enter Note If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Customizing the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Do one or more of the following e Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions a Click Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization b Select the check boxes to specify which i
70. is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CECEO Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Rep
71. is not saved and it does not become the default setting Attendance message alert Warning A Status message bar If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks If an error condition occurs then this icon appears Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy e Show printer conditions such as Toner Lowor Cartridge Low e Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing Understanding the printer control panel 18 Feature Description Printer IP address The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer Example 123 123 123 123 Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Side Duplex Collate Copy from o Letter 8 5 x 11 in q 2 R lt 2 Z A f 13 i Copy to j Letter 8 5 x 11 in Plain Paper o 110 2 Sided On Content Scale Auto E 100 oe Text Photo Save As Shortcut Darkness n j 1 n 6 aN Touch aK View a list of options Print a copy Advanced
72. may contain a formatting error or invalid data Delete the print job and then send it again e For PDF files generate a new PDF and then print it again If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one For Windows users a Open the Print Properties folder b Fromthe Print and Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box c Enter a PIN number For Macintosh users Save each print job name each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the printer Does the job print The problem is solved Go to step 3 Troubleshooting Step 3 Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs Does the job print Envelope seals when printing Action a Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment Note Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the flaps b Resend the print job Does the envelope seal when printing XR The problem is solved Yes Contact customer support 323 Add additional printer memory The problem is solved Error message about reading the flash drive appears Action Step 1 Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port Note The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB port Is the flash drive inserted into the front U
73. multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer e Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator Loading paper and specialty media 81 Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams 6 For custom or universal size paper adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack 7 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Linking and unlinking trays The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same When a linked tray becomes empty paper feeds from the next linked tray To prevent trays from linking assign a unique custom paper type name Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking e To link trays make sure the p
74. of the scanned card Notes When scanning a card make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color and 400 dpi for black and white When scanning multiple cards make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color and 300 dpi for black and white e Print Borders Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Card Copy on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions Using MyShortcut Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Setting up and using the home screen applications 24 Use a Create shortcuts on the printer home screen with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy fax or e mail jobs To use the application touch MyShortcut and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Multi Send Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Use To Scan a document and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations Note Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address
75. of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the holder out of the finisher 3 Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers and then remove the staple case from the cartridge Maintaining the printer 263 4 Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge and then push the rear side into the cartridge 5 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place 6 Close the stapler door Moving the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely Before moving the printer CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Maintaining the printer 264 e If an optional tray is installed then remove it from the printer To remove the optional tray slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place e Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it e Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Before setting up the printer make sure there is adequate clearance around it Use only the power cord provided with this product or t
76. on the home screen 21 holding faxes 140 hole punch box emptying 250 home screen customizing 21 hiding icons 21 showing icons 21 home screen applications configuring 22 385 finding information 22 home screen buttons and icons description 16 HTML menu 235 l icons on the home screen hiding 21 showing 21 Image menu 236 imaging unit ordering 253 Imaging unit low 84 xy 300 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy 300 Imaging unit very low x estimated pages remain 84 xy 300 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 26 Incompatible output bin x 59 300 Incompatible tray x 59 301 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 301 individual settings information erasing 244 initial fax setup 120 using the Embedded Web Server 120 Insert hole punch box 301 Insert staple cartridge 301 Insert Tray x 301 inserting a header or footer 108 Install bin x 301 Install duplex 302 Install Tray x 302 installing an Internal Solutions Port 34 installing an optional card 32 installing internal options order of installation 46 installing printer 51 installing printer hard disk 39 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 302 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 302 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 303 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 303 Index Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 303 internal optio
77. or printing at elevated temperatures Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser type Note Use a 110 volt fuser for printing on letter size paper and a 220 volt fuser for printing on A4 size paper b Resend the print job Does the print speed increase Step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer a Replace the fuser For more information on installing the fuser see support the instruction sheet that came with the part b Resend the print job Does the print speed increase Print jobs do not print Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the document you are trying to print open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer Note If the printer is not the default printer then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Mig Troubleshooting Action Step 2 a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on and if Ready appears on the printer display b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 3 327 Step 3 Ifan error message appears on the printer display then clear the message Note The printer continues to print after clearing the message Do the jobs print Step 4 a Check if the por
78. original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Select from the following content sources Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Magazine The original document is from a magazine Copying 111 Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Photo Film The original document is a photo from film Press The original document was printed using a printing press Save As Shortcut This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name Note Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number Using the advanced options Select from the following settings Advanced Duplex This specifies the document orientation whether documents are one sided or two sided and how documents are bound Advanced Imaging This changes or adjusts Auto Center Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Sharpness settings before you copy the document Create Booklet This creates a booklet You can choose between one sided and two sided Note This option appears only when a hard disk is installed Cover Page Setup Th
79. printer Step 2 Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection Use the correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the USB or parallel interface card Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly Na The problem is solved Contact customer support Troubleshooting 321 Paper feed problems Jammed pages are not reprinted Action Yes No Turn on Jam Recovery The problem is solved Contact customer a From the home screen navigate to support gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery b From the Jam Recovery menu touch the arrows to scroll to On or Auto c Touch Submit Do pages reprint after a jam Paper frequently jams Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray e Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray e Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper e Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator e Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type b Insert the tray properly If jam recovery is enabled then the print jobs will reprint automatically Do paper jams still occur frequently Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a Load pa
80. program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 100 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled Saving money and the environment 242 To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the p
81. rating capacity of these types of accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance property damage or potential fire Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage
82. seen on the rear of the fuser Maintaining the printer 253 Notes e Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit The separator roller fuser pick roller assembly and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary For more information on replacing the parts included in the maintenance kit see the instruction sheet that came with each part Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kit type Part number 40X8420 XM7100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 00 40X8421 40X8422 XM7100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 01 XM7100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 02 40X8423 40X8424 XM7100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 03 XM7100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 04 iy Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kit type Type Part number XM7100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 05 40X8425 XM7100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 06 40X8426 XM7100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 07 40X8427 XM7100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 08 40X8428 XM7100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 09 40X8429 Lexmark roller kit Part number XM7100 Series roller kit 40X7706 Lexmark ADF maintenance kit Part number XM7100 Series ADF maintenance
83. set SmartSwitch to On b Resend the print job Do incorrect characters print XR Contact customer support The problem is solved Me Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper Action Step 1 a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray b Resend the print job Step 2 a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Step 3 a Depending on your operating system open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog and then specify the paper type b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Go to step 3 Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Go to step 4 325 Troubleshooting Action Step 4 a Check if the trays are not linked b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Yes The problem is solved No Contact customer support Ni Large jobs do not collate a From the printer software set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note Setting Collate to 1 1 1 2 2 2 in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu b Resend
84. settings and then touch Scan It Understanding the scan options FTP This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 File Name This option lets you type a file name for the scan image Save As Shortcut This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name Note Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number Original Size This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Scanning 149 Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document Resolution This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size Send As This option lets you set the output type for the scan image Select one of the following PDF Use to create a single file with multiple pages The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file TIFF Use to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu then TIFF saves one
85. the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which t
86. the fax resolution 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options Faxing 139 4 From the Resolution area touch the arrows to select the resolution you want Note Select a resolution from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine best quality at a reduced speed 5 Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 Adjust the fax darkness and then touch Fax It Viewing a fax log 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address fi
87. the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Step 3 The problem is solved Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Contact customer Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size support of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job Did the job print and collate correctly X SJ Multiple language PDF files do not print Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Checkifthe print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts For more information see the documentation that came with Adobe Acrobat b Generate a new PDF file and then resend the print job Do the files print Ne Troubleshooting 326 Action Yes No Step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat support b Click File gt Print gt Advanced gt Print As Image gt OK gt OK Do the files print Ni Printing slows down Notes e When printing using narrow paper the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time
88. the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the indicated bin 4 Contact customer support at http support lexmark com or your service representative From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin Troubleshooting 308 Reattach bins x y Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Reattach the indicated bins 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the indicated bins 4 Reattach the bins 5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on Remove the indicated bins 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the indicated bins 4 Contact customer support at http support lexmark com or your service representative From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the indicated bins Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy Try one or more of the following e Check if the toner cartridge is missing If missing install the toner cartridge For information on installing the cartridge see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide e ifthe toner cartridge is installed then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinst
89. the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately e When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data e When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus c
90. the scanner glass in the upper left corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Contact customer support Load the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Poor scanned image quality Action Step 1 Check if an error message appears on the display Is there an error message on the printer display Step 2 Check the quality of the original document Is the quality of the original document satisfactory Yes Clear the error message Go to step 3 No Go to step 2 Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher quality output Troubleshooting Action Step 3 Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean lint free cloth dampened with water Is the scanner glass clean Step 4 Check the placement of the document or photo Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Step 5 Send a print job and then check for print quality problems From the General Settings menu adjust the Eco Mode settings e From the Copy menu adjust the Darkness setting e When the print becomes faded replace the toner cartridge Is the print quality satisfactory Step 6 Check the scan settings From the Scan screen make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned Are the Content Type
91. this menu appears as Standard Network or Network x 2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed Understanding the printer menus 152 Paper menu Default Source menu Use Ae Default Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Notes Multipurpose Feeder Manual Paper e Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting Manual Envelope From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting e If two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have the same settings then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray Configure MP menu Use a Ke Configure MP Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Cassette Notes Manual e Cassette is the factory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source First e Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs e First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Understanding the printer menus Paper Size Type menu Tray x Size A4 AS A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Tray x Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycl
92. to format the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk Install a hard disk with higher capacity Empty the hole punch box Try one or more of the following Empty the hole punch box e Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing e Cancel the print job Error reading USB drive Remove USB An unsupported USB device is inserted Remove the USB device and then insert a supported one Error reading USB hub Remove hub An unsupported USB hub has been inserted Remove the USB hub and then install a supported one Fax memory full From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Turn off the printer and then turn it back on If the message appears again then contact your system support person Troubleshooting 300 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Fax
93. touch Next Are fax and e mail functions set up Received fax has poor print quality Action Step 1 Ask the person who sent you the fax to a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory b Increase the fax scan resolution if possible c Resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory The problem is solved Yes The problem is solved Yes The problem is solved 356 Contact customer support No Contact customer support Suen Go to step 2 Troubleshooting 357 Action Yes No Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Print a network setup page or menu settings page and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section b Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup c Inthe Max Speed menu click one of the following e 2400 e 4800 e 9600 e 14400 e 33600 d Click Submit and then resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer Replace the toner cartridge support When C
94. using transparencies on page 85 d Paper sizes types and weights supported by the output options Supported paper sizes Paper size 4 bin mailbox Offset stacker Staple finisher Staple hole punch finisher A6 V X X X A5 V V V 13 JIS B5 J J vV v Executive V vV V2 v2 Letter V vV V J na v v vV v Legal V V vV Vve Folio V J V V Oficio V V V v 1 The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded long edge first 2 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 3 The finisher stacks and staples the paper but does not punch holes in it 4 The finisher staples the paper if its width is from 210 mm 8 27 in to 217 mm 8 54 in and its length is from 210 mm 8 27 in to 356 mm 14 in Paper and specialty media guide 91 Staple hole punch finisher 4 bin mailbox Offset stacker Staple finisher Paper size Statement Universal 1 The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded long edge first 2 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 3 The finisher stacks and staples the paper but does not punch holes in it 4 The finisher staples the paper if its width is from 210 mm 8 27 in to 217 mm 8 54 in and its length is from 210 mm 8 27 in to 356 mm 14 in Supported paper types and weights Paper type Paper weight 4 bin mailbox Offset stacker Staple finisher Staple hole punch fini
95. 0 IPv6 menu To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports menu gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt IPv6 e Network Ports menu gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers Use Pa ees Enable IPv6 Enable IPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Auto Configuration Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 On address configuration entries provided by a router Off Note On is the factory default setting Set Hostname Set the host name View Address Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Router Address Enable DHCPv6 Enable DHCPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off XX S Wireless menu Note This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless network adapter To access the menu navigate to Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless Use a Ke Wi Fi Protected Setup Establish a wireless network and enable network security Start Push Button Method Start PIN Method Notes e Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router are pressed within a given period of time Star
96. 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided to 2 sided Paper Saver Off 2 up Portrait 2 up Landscape 4 up Portrait 4 up Landscape Print Page Borders On Off Collate 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Specify whether an original document is two sided duplex or one sided and then to specify whether the copy should be two sided or one sided Notes 1 sided to 1 sided The original document has print on one side and the copy will also have print on one side 1 sided to 2 sided The original document has print on one side while the copy will have print on both sides e 2 sided to 1 sided The original document has print on both sides while the copy will have print on just one side e 2 sided to 2 sided The original document has print on both sides and the copy will also have print on both sides Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether or not a border is printed Note Off is the factory default setting Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting Punch Specify the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job Off Note Off is the factory default setting 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Staple Enable or disable the staple finisher Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when
97. 2 The problem is solved a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray support b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the tray or feeder from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper type From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight to match menu to match the paper loaded in the tray the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Mic Troubleshooting 344 Action Yes No Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential
98. 37 Additional printer setup 9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield 10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP Warning Potential Damage Do not screw it on too tightly 38 Additional printer setup 39 11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Installing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 2 Unpack the printer hard disk Additional printer setup 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP
99. 42 Page Setup This option lets you change the following settings e Sides Duplex This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page duplex This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax e Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Select from the following content types e Graphics tThe original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Select from the following content sources Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer e Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Magazine The original document is from a magazine Newspaper tThe original document is from a newspaper e Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer e
100. 6 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 343 streaked vertical lines appear on prints 344 streaks appear 347 subject and message information adding to e mail 115 Substitute Size menu 156 supplies checking status 251 checking from printer control panel 251 checking using the Embedded Web Server 251 conserving 238 storing 254 using genuine Lexmark 252 using recycled paper 238 supplies ordering imaging unit 253 maintenance kit 252 staple cartridges 254 toner cartridge 252 Supply needed to complete job 313 supply notifications configuring 266 supported flash drives 95 supported paper sizes 88 90 supported paper types 90 supported paper types and weights 90 supported paper weights 90 T TCP IP menu 168 telecommunication notices 371 372 373 374 the scanner does not respond 361 tips card stock 83 labels paper 84 on using envelopes 83 on using letterhead 84 transparencies 85 tips on using envelopes 83 tips on using letterhead 84 toner cartridge ordering 252 replacing 255 258 toner cartridges recycling 241 toner darkness adjusting 93 Too many bins attached 58 314 Too many disks installed 58 314 Too many flash options installed 58 314 Too many trays attached 58 314 touch screen buttons 18 transparencies copying on 101 loading 75 tips 85 Tray x paper size unsupported 314 trays linking 81 82 unlinking 81 82 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 362 cannot open Embedded Web Ser
101. 6 Turn the printer back on If the error occurs again then 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the tray 4 Contact customer support From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job Close door or insert cartridge The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly Insert the cartridge and then close all doors and covers Close finisher rear door Close the rear door of the finisher Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job 2yy xx Try one or more of the following e Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job e Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan job Troubleshooting 298 Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job Note This does not cancel the scan job All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying faxing or e mailing e Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job Close rear door Close the rear door of the printer Close top access cover Close the printer top access cover to clear the message Complex page some data may not have printed 39 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing
102. 7 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job e Cancel the current print job Troubleshooting 303 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save clear the message and continue printing Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory Load paper source with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper To use the tray with the correct paper size or type touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default paper source e Cancel the current job Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct
103. 8 in JIS BS 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 in Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 in 1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel then you may select common paper sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size Type menu If the paper size is not available then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing For more information contact customer support 2 Paper is supported in long edge orientation 3 Universal is supported in ADF only if the width is from 76 mm 3 in to 216 mm 8 5 in and the length is from 127 mm 5 in to 356 mm 14 in Paper and specialty media guide Paper size Legal Dimensions 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in 550 sheet tray 2100 sheet tray Multipurpose feeder Duplex ADF Scanner glass v 89 Executive Oficio M xico Folio 184 x 267 mm 7 3 x 10 5 in 216 x 340 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 in Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 in LISIS ee Se a SS Universal 105 x 148 mm to 216 x 356 mm 4 13 x 5 83 in to 8 5 x 14 in 70 x 127 mm to 216 x 356 mm 2 76 x 5 in to 8 5 x 14 in lt gt 7 3 4 Envelope Monarch 10 Envelope DL Envelope 98 x 191 mm 3 9 x 7 5 in Bs bw x x O N 553 3 x lt 110 x 220 mm 4 3 x 8 7 in x lt x lt x lt x lt
104. A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Sides Duplex off Long edge Short edge 200 To Specify the size of the original document Note Mixed Sizes is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two sided scanning Note Off is the factory default setting Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Specify the content of the original document Note Text is the factory default setting Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Dial Prefix Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Enter a dialing prefix such as 99 A numeric entry field is provided Dialing Prefix Rules Prefix Rule x Establish a dialing prefix rule Understanding the printer menus Use Automatic Redial 0 9 Redial frequency 1 200 201 To Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the number of minutes between redials Note 3 is the factory default setting Behind a PABX Yes No Enable ECM Yes No Enable Fax Scans On Off Driver to fax Yes N
105. Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button menu select Hibernate and then touch Submit Adjusting the brightness of the printer display To save energy or if you have trouble reading the display adjust its brightness settings Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Saving money and the environment 241 Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings 3 Inthe Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see e The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Go to www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection
106. Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints XL J Streaked vertical lines appear on prints Leading edge i Saas ChE 7 Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the From the printer control panel set the paper texture type and weight in following the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray e Specify the paper texture type and Do the paper texture type and weight match the paper in the tray weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray e Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture type and weight specified in the tray settings Troubleshooting 345 Action Yes No Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh pac
107. E Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Notices 378 Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza ze niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostatymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto esta conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje Ze tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky prisluSn ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloGili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt star i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG K STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS LEXMARK LED PRINTERS AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United St
108. Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Paper and specialty media guide 84 Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes e Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Before loading the envelopes on the tray flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface Note A combination of high humidity over 60 and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels loaded in the tray e Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities For more information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide at http support lexmark com e Use labels designed specifically for laser printers e Do not use labels with slick backing material e Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and
109. IER SENET TOL F HICMRSRWEDICUTS REV Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Mode Description Power consumption Watts Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 760 XM7155 860 XM7163 960 XM7170 Copy The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original 820 XM7155 920 XM7163 1020 documents XM7170 Scan The product is scanning hard copy documents 140 Ready The product is waiting for a print job 120 Ready 1 70 Ready 2 Sleep Mode The product is in a high level energy saving mode 16 Hibernate The product is in a low level energy saving mode 0 7 Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet but the power switch is 0 turned off The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Notices 370 Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout
110. Is the scanner glass clean Step 4 Go to step 5 See Print quality Send a print job and then check for print quality problems problems on a From the General Settings menu adjust the Eco Mode settings page 330 b From the Copy menu adjust the Darkness setting c lf the print remains faded then replace the toner cartridge Is the print quality satisfactory Step 5 Go to step 6 Place the document or Check the placement of the document or photo photo facedown on the Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner alice see in the glass in the upper left corner upper iert corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Step 6 Go to step 7 Change the Content Check the copy settings Type and Content From the Copy screen check if the Content Type and Content Source BRA A to settings are correct for the document being scanned mate tie gocument being scanned Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned Step 7 Go to step 8 The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 8 Check for missing or faded text on prints a From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging b Adjust the settings Sharpness lIncrease the current setting Contrast Increase the current setting c Resend the copy job Do prints have missing or faded text Step 9 Check for washed out or overexposed output a From the Copy screen n
111. It Scanning an FTP using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt ia gt type the name of the recipient gt Search 4 Touch the name of the recipient Note To search for additional recipients touch New Search and then type the name of the next recipient 5 Touch oS gt Send It Scanning to a computer or flash drive Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single page documents small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Scanning 147 The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive images using Scan to Computer You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open
112. LEXMARK XM7100 Series User s Guide August 2014 Machine type s 7463 Model s 496 696 896 www lexmark com Contents 2 Contents Safety information sssessssosseseosseseosessssossesecsssseossssesossesecsesseessssesosssseeses Learning about the printer sessssessssssosscsesseosesseesecssssecsessssossssssesossossessse J Finding information about the Printer ccccscssssscccecceceecescessensaeeseeceeeesecssceseeusaeeseesesesesessesseeseseseeenes 9 Selecting a location for the Printer cccccccccsssssssscccececssssssseeeeeeccssessessseeececeesesssaseseeeceeesesssasesesnenaeaeees 10 Printer COMP PUFA ONS sekaca enese ra E E a e E a 12 Understanding the basic functions of the SCANNEL ssscccceesssssssssnseeceesceesesnsnseseeesssesesnssueaeeeessesesenees 13 Using the ADF and scanner glass aranista aie a aae aeee anat aiei E 14 Understanding the printer control panel ccsccssecsccssccsccsccescescescssees L5 Using the printer controlpanel reiissi aani as e aa ataa nE aiaee Ei 15 Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights c c ccssssssecceceececessesessssessenennaes 15 Understanding the HOME SCreENissi oniiir nokni oaee naa aE E E DE aE EEE Tea 16 Using the touch screen DUttOns ccccccesesssssnseeceecesecesesesessusaeceeececeseseseusaeeseeeecessesessasseeseceseesseeeeseeesees 18 Setting up and using the home screen applications
113. Letterhead Texture Smooth Normal Rough Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Preprinted Texture Smooth Normal Rough Colored Texture Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Light Texture Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Understanding the printer menus Heavy Texture Smooth Normal Rough Rough Cotton Texture Rough Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting Custom x Texture Smooth Normal Rough Paper Weight menu Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Use To Plain Weight Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Card Stock Weight Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded Light Note N
114. Loading paper and specialty media 70 c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot Note Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place Loading A4 letter legal oficio and folio size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Loading paper and specialty media 71 b Ifthe A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide then remove it from its place If the A5 length guide is not attached then proceed to step d c Put the AS length guide in its holder Loading paper and specialty media 72 d Squeeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place 3 Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper is loaded properly e There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Loading paper and specialty media Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher XR One sided printing Two sided printing One sided printing Two sided printing 73 e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finis
115. P the printer SOWA eeccccsassessnetnescdsscssssevaddas chedacevesvesebonncevagebieddeosnsestedbiddsdasvepawubduyenseueisdedesss 51 Networking rsio aa Bde wal Ceseduu eda oaav baa God ces achat tecdacessesadetatauy deeds saul acanesGedadvaubtsdeencedssoan 52 Verifying printer SECU P ecserin npa oi aaa a aE aE a Ea E ia 56 Loading paper and specialty medi a sssessssssssssssscssssssssessssssessssssssesssssee DS Setting the paper siz eand TYPO saiscesacceccsansateedaccos cdeadssinsheceeecel dasauesedeadsoads Jduuseadoadhaaanvacsvssnbaayardesadaaiaessderee 58 Contents 3 Configuring Universal paper Settings cccccccccsssssssssseeceeccescesesessesnsnsaeeeeeececeecessesesauauaueaseseeeeseseeseeees 58 Loading the 550 SHEet traydor aaa a sad ecchdgetondssbenevenassbeccnassendsasevuevecgeaeentoaestees 58 Loading the 21 00 SHEeUt AY aisccesccas iatcectin baad ae enna de a ootbawaeeescheas aa ee ia Weed 68 Loading the multipurpose FECCES cccccccccecesssssssssseeceeeecscesseseeseeceescesessusaeeeecesesesessssasaeeeeeenseesesenses 75 Linking an QUNIINKING trays serasa a rataan ara aa a a Aa eaea Aaa aaraa ka ANADA deeds vsns 81 Paper and specialty Media guide essssessesessecsesecsessssecsesessesecsecseseessss BD Using specialty Medias ssnin n a A a E AEE AAE A E a aSa aa aaa aK a aeia 83 Paper guideline Sininen a a a E a a a a a eean 85 Supported paper sizes types and WEIGNHS ccccssssssssceeceecesssesseaeeee
116. SB port Yes Go to step 2 No Insert the flash drive into the front USB port Step 2 Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green Note A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy Is the indicator light blinking green Wait until the printer is ready then view the held jobs list and then print the documents Go to step 3 Check if the flash drive is supported For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives see Supported flash drives and file types on page 95 Does the error message still appear X Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Check for an error message on the display b Clear the message Does the error message still appear Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved Ni Troubleshooting Action Step 5 Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person Does the error message still appear Incorrect characters print Action Step 1 Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode Note If Ready Hex appears on the printer display then turn off the printer and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode Is the printer in Hex Trace mode Contact customer support Yes Deactivate Hex Trace mode 324 The problem is solved Go to step 2 Step 2 a From the printer control panel select Standard Network or Network x and then
117. Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time e Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination e Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF through an FTP Using the ADF and scanner glass Scanner glass Automatic document feeder ADF Use the ADF for multiple page documents including two Use the scanner glass for single page documents book pages sided duplex pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents Using the ADF When using the ADF e Load the document into the ADF tray faceup short edge first e Load up to 150 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray e Scan sizes from 76 2 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches wide to 216 x 635 mm 8 5 x 25 inches long Scan media weighs from 52 to 120 g m 14 32 lb e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass When using the scanner glass e Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow e Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 inches e Copy books up to 25 3 mm 1 inch thick Understanding the printer control panel 15 Understanding the printer control panel
118. The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting e On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk e Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Advanced Status On Off Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes e On is the factory default setting e Off disables parallel port negotiation Understanding the printer menus 175 Use To Protocol Specify the parallel port protocol Standard Notes Fastbytes Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Honor Init Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests
119. UENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Patent acknowledgment The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography ECC Cipher Suites for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA 256 382 and AES Galois Counter Mode GCM implemented in the product or service The use of this product or se
120. a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Click Scan Profile gt Create Scan Profile Select your scan settings and then click Next Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image u A U N Type a scan name and then a user name Note The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display 6 Click Submit Note Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents 7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen a Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides c Do either of the following Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad From the home screen navigate to Held Jobs gt Profiles gt select you
121. a eaa aan E EA a Taasan ias 322 Solving copy problem Siaina a a e a a aa a a 348 Solving fax proble Sinnen e e E EEE E E E E na naaueesaheioseets 351 Solving scanner PrODIEMS cseescsccccececeecescessssesnsnsaeecseceseeecessesesesnsnsaeeeeeseceesesesesseeausueaeeseseauasaueaeagess 357 Solving home screen application ProbleMs cssccccccccessssssssseecceecessessnseseceeeecsesesnseseeeeeessesessaseeeeeesess 362 Embedded Web Server does not OPen cccccescesssssesssnsnsanseaeeceeceescecessesesessessnsauaueeeeeseseeeeseeseseseseeeness 362 Contacting customer SUPPOMT cccccccccccneeeseeeeeccceaaeeeeeeeeeceeeassessaeeeeeeeasseesssseeeeceeeaaeauseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeauages 363 Contents 6 Doi e AEE EE T EEA OR E EE E TE EEEE SOG Product INFOMATION ccccccccssecccceeecccececcecceeesccceesssececeueecessusseeeesseececsusseeeuusseseussscsscuuscesacseueusesesaeeeees 364 Ro Lola M ALONE E EEE AER TTE E TAEAE AE EEE ttc k PEE EEEE ETET 364 Power consumption u ccucciccenceh aan cele A ER E ected ESTARA AA AR 369 NCO hak ek ie EEN NEERA ENE ENE ERT EEEE AEE AEREE Safety information 7 Safety information Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use this product with extension cords multioutlet power strips multioutlet extenders or other types of surge or UPS devices The power
122. a staple finisher is installed Understanding the printer menus Use Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Difficult Media Letter Difficult Media A5 Difficult Media Legal Difficult Media A4 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in ID Card To Specify the paper size of the original document Notes e Letter is the U S factory default setting e A4 is the international factory default setting 195 Copy To Source Tray x Auto Size Match Multipurpose Feeder Specify the paper source for copy jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Transparency Separators On Off Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Place a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is the factory default setting Place a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Separator Sheet Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Lighten or darken the print for the copy job Note 5 is the factory default setting 196 Understanding the printer menus Use Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Number of Copies To Specify the bin to be used for the copy job Notes Standard Bin is the factory
123. acing separator sheets between copies 106 port settings configuring 55 PostScript menu 232 power cord socket 49 preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network 52 print driver hardware options adding 51 print irregularities 337 print job canceling from computer 99 print quality cleaning the scanner glass 248 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 335 characters have jagged edges 330 clipped pages or images 330 compressed images appear on prints 331 gray background on prints 332 horizontal voids appear on prints 333 print irregularities 337 print is too dark 338 print is too light 340 printer is printing solid black pages 336 repeating defects appear on prints 341 shadow images appear on prints 342 skewed print 342 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 343 streaked vertical lines 344 toner fog or background shading appears on prints 345 toner rubs off 346 toner specks appear on prints 346 transparency print quality is poor 347 uneven print density 347 white streaks 347 print troubleshooting envelope seals when printing 323 error reading flash drive 323 held jobs do not print 322 incorrect characters print 324 incorrect margins on prints 334 jammed pages are not reprinted 321 job prints from wrong tray 324 job prints on wrong paper 324 jobs do not print 326 Large jobs do not collate 325 multiple language PDF files do not print 325 paper curl 335 paper frequently jams 321 print job takes longer than
124. ack and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies Be careful not to scratch them e Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper or specialty media Note Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time e Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled e There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher One sided printing One sided printing Loading paper and specialty media 79 Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher Two sided printing Two sided printing e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray One sided printing Two sided printing Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Loading paper and specialty media 80 Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the
125. ad of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe All Settings The printer restarts several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs and passwords from the printer memory 4 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory Notes Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed e Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on the touch screen displays a list of functions 3 Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following e Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass e Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method
126. address use a shortcut number or use the address book You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the home screen For more information see Activating the home screen applications on page 22 Sending a fax using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides Faxing 136 3 From the home screen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut Note To add recipients touch Next number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Select the printer and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Fax gt Enable fax and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers 4 If necessary configure other fax settings 5 Apply the changes and then send the fax job Notes e The fax option is available only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver For more information go to http support le
127. age correctly 2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel Setting up e mail alerts Configure the printer to send you e mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added or when there is a paper jam 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings 3 From the Other Settings menu click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items you want to be notified on and then type the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note For information on setting up the e mail server contact your system support person Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer network and supplies 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Managing the printer 266 Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disa
128. ages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes e Make sure to set the paper size to letter legal A4 or JIS B5 e Make sure to set the copy size to 100 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Paper Saver gt select the output you want gt ZS gt Copy It Note If Paper Saver is set to Off then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable Creating a custom copy job The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings and then it scans the next set with the same or different settings The definition of a set depends on the scan source If you scan a document on the scanner glass then a set consists of one page e If you scan multiple pages using the ADF then a set consists of all scanned p
129. ages until the ADF tray becomes empty f you scan one page using the ADF then a set consists of one page Copying 108 For example 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Custom Job gt On gt aS gt Copy It Note When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears 4 Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed Note Change the scan job settings if necessary 5 Ifyou have another document to scan then repeat the previous step Otherwise touch Finish the job Placing information on copies Placing a header or footer on pages 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator l
130. alling the supply then the cartridge is defective Replace the toner cartridge Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy Try one or more of the following e Check if the imaging unit is missing If missing install the imaging unit For information on installing the imaging unit see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide e ifthe imaging unit is installed then remove the unresponsive imaging unit and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the imaging unit is defective Replace the imaging unit Remove defective disk 61 Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk Troubleshooting 309 Remove packaging material area name Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location Remove paper from all bins Remove the paper from all of the bins The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from bin x Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from linked set bin name Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from standa
131. am or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context sensitive information Notes e Help is automatically installed with the printer software e The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Learning about the printer 10 What are you looking for Find it here The latest supplemental information updates and customer Lexmark support Web site support http support lexmark com e Documentation Note Select your country or region and then select Driver downloads your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your Voice support printer Live chat support E mail support Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster e Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region In the U S See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or go to http support lexmark com e In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with this printer Selecting a location for the pr
132. amp or Overwrite existing file check box selected in the destination configuration settings Yes Close the file you are scanning Contact customer support 360 No Go to step 4 Select the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box in the destination configuration settings Scanner unit does not close Action Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit a Lift the scanner unit b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open c Lower the scanner unit Did the scanner unit close correctly r Yes The problem is solved No Contact customer support Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer Action Step 1 Check if other applications are interfering with the scan Close all applications that are not being used Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved Step 2 Select a lower scan resolution Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer Contact customer support The problem is solved Troubleshooting The scanner does not respond Action Step 1 Check if the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Step 2 Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer pri
133. and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned Yes Go to step 4 Go to step 5 Go to step 6 Go to step 7 359 No Gy See Cleaning the scanner glass on page 248 Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner u See Print quality problems on page 330 Change the Content Type and Content Source settings to match the document being scanned Step 7 Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher quality output Did the increased resolution produce a higher quality output Scan job was not successful Action Step 1 Check the cable connections Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Are the cables securely connected Problem solved Yes Go to step 2 Contact customer support No Connect the cables properly Step 2 Check if the file name is already in use Is the file name already in use p S Change the file name Go to step 3 Troubleshooting Action Step 3 Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another application or being used by another user Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user Step 4 Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings Is the Append time st
134. andard Network 166 Standard USB 172 Index Substitute Size 156 TCP IP 168 Universal Setup 163 Utilities 230 Wireless 170 XPS 231 menus diagram 151 message e mail options 116 Miscellaneous Security Settings menu 180 mobile device printing from 96 moving the printer 10 263 264 Multi Send adding a profile 24 setting up 24 multipurpose feeder loading 75 MyShortcut about 23 N Network x menu 166 Network x software error 54 306 Network Card menu 168 Network Reports menu 168 network settings Embedded Web Server 265 network setup page printing 57 Networking Guide where to find 265 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 306 noise emission levels 366 Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 33 xy 306 non volatile memory 243 erasing 244 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 306 notices 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 number of remaining pages estimate 252 O OCR Settings menu 224 optional 550 sheet tray loading 58 optional card installing 32 options 550 sheet tray installing 46 firmware cards 27 Internal Solutions Port installing 34 memory card 27 31 printer hard disk installing 39 printer hard disk removing 44 options copy screen copy from 109 scale 110 options touch screen copy 109 e mail 116 118 ordering imaging unit 253 maintenance kit 252 staple cartridges 254 ordering supplies toner cartridge 252 organizing cabl
135. aper menu on the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Specify the paper size Depending on your operating system specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do copies print properly Go to step 3 The problem is solved Change the paper size setting to match the paper loaded in the tray or load the tray with paper that matches the paper size setting Contact customer support Troubleshooting Poor copy quality Action Step 1 Check if an error or status message appears on the display Does an error or status message appear Yes Clear the error or status message 350 Go to step 2 Check for patterns on prints a From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Sharpness gt select a lower setting Note Make sure no scaling is being selected b Resend the copy job Do patterns appear on prints XR Step 2 Go to step 3 Increase the scan Check the quality of the original document resolution setting for a higher quality output Is the quality of the original document satisfactory Step 3 Go to step 4 See Cleaning the If dark marks appear on prints then clean the scanner glass and the ADF scanner glass on glass using a clean lint free cloth dampened with water page 248
136. aper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray e To unlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information see Setting the paper size and type on page 58 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Creating a custom name for a paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 3 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name 82 Loading paper and specialty media 4 Click Submit 5 Click Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to B gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 2 Select a custom name and then type a cus
137. aper you are printing on 340 No The problem is solved Change the paper type texture and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray The problem is solved Go to step 5 Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Nee eee Go to step 6 The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 6 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Yes Go to step 7 341 No The problem is solved Contact customer The problem is solved Step 7 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Is the print still too light Repeating defects appear on prints Action Yes No Go to step 2 The problem is solved Step 1 a Replace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is equal to any of the following e 47 8 mm 1 88 in e 96 8 mm 3 81 in e 28 5 mm 1 12 in b Resend the print job Do repeating defects still
138. ar the network printer From your computer you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Remote Operator Panel Settings 3 Select the Enable check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Submit To use the application click Remote Operator Panel gt Launch VNC Applet Setting up and using the home screen applications 26 Exporting and importing a configuration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 To export or import a configuration for one application do the following a Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management b From the list of installed applications click the name of the application you want to configure c Click Configure and then do either of the following e To export a configuration to a file click Export and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save
139. artridge low 88 xy appears replace the cartridge and then resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory Solving scanner problems e Cannot scan from a computer on page 358 e Partial document or photo scans on page 358 e Poor scanned image quality on page 358 e Scan job was not successful on page 359 e Scanner unit does not close on page 360 e Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer on page 360 e The scanner does not respond on page 361 Troubleshooting Cannot scan from a computer 358 Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 3 Go to step 2 Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer display before scanning a job Does Ready appear before scanning the job Step 2 Clear the error Go to step 3 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Is there an error message on the printer display message Step 3 Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server secure Partial document or photo scans Contact customer support Tighten the cable connections Check the placement of the document or photo Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on
140. ates and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product lIs manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall en
141. ators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Loading paper and specialty media 61 Loading paper and specialty media 62 3 Unlock the length guide and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Notes e Lock the length guide for all paper sizes e Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Loading paper and specialty media 63 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly e There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not One sided printing One sided printing Loading paper and specialty media 64 Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher Two sided printing Two sided printing e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray One sided printing Two sided printing Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Loading paper and specialty media 65 e Do not slide the paper into the tray L
142. auses the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Serial Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Set the size of the serial input buffer Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed e The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus 177 Use To Job Buffering Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Off Notes On Auto e Off is the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk e On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk e Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Protocol Select the hardware and s
143. avigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging b Adjust the settings of the following Background Removal Reduce the current setting e Shadow Detail Reduce the current setting c Resend the copy job Do pages show washed out or overexposed prints Yes Go to step 9 Contact customer support 351 No The problem is solved The problem is solved Scanner unit does not close Action Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the printer a Lift the scanner unit b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open c Lower the scanner unit Did the scanner unit close properly Yes The problem is solved Contact customer support Solving fax problems e Caller ID is not shown on page 352 e Cannot send or receive a fax on page 352 e Can receive but not send faxes on page 354 e Can send but not receive faxes on page 355 e Fax and e mail functions are not set up on page 356 e Received fax has poor print quality on page 356 Troubleshooting Caller ID is not shown Action Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service Notes e If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns then you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of the
144. ax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings 3 From the Fax Forwarding menu select Print Print and Forward or Forward 4 From the Forward to menu select Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF 5 Inthe Forward to Shortcut field enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the Forward to menu 6 Click Submit Understanding the fax options Resolution This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size Select one of the following e Standard Use this when faxing most documents Fine 200 dpi Use this when faxing documents with small prints Super fine 300 dpi Use this when faxing documents with fine details e Ultra fine 600 dpi Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document Faxing 1
145. ble it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low low very low or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Notes e Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge imaging unit and maintenance kit e All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low low and very low supply conditions Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end of life supply condition E mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu for each supply select one of the following notification options Notification Description Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs E mail Only The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the
146. bmit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Touch Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes e Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks e Astatus bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu Securing the printer 246 The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Finding printer security information In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons For more information visit the Lexmark security Web page You can also see the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide for additional information 1 Go
147. ce lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port a 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On This sets the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Answer On b Select the pattern setting you want to change and then touch Submit Setting the outgoing fax name and number 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Fax Name field type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 Inthe Fax Number field enter th
148. ce the maintenance kit very soon For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message If necessary touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Memory full 38 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Cancel job to clear the message e Install additional printer memory Memory full cannot print faxes From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes attempt to print after the printer is restarted Troubleshooting 306 Memory full cannot send faxes 1 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job 2 Try one or more of the following Reduce the fax resolution and then resend the fax job e Reduce the number of pages in the fax and then resend the fax job No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled Connect the printer to an analog phone line Network x software error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to continue printing e Turn off the printer wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on e Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Non Lexmark supply type see User s Guide 33 xy No
149. cescecessssseeeeceseessesssaueaeeseeseeeees 88 Printing forms ANd a COCUMENL ccceceesssssseececeesessesnsseeeceececsssseususeseeecescessessseseeeceseseesususaeeessaeeeeesesees 93 Printing from a flash drive or mobile CEVICE ce sceccccccceeceeessesnsnsseaececeeceececessesssauaueaseseceeeseesusesseseeeeseees 94 Printing confidential and other held jODS cs ccccccccecccsssssssseececceeecesessneaeeeeeeceeceesesssssseseeeeesesseseeeeeeees 96 Printing information PABeS csicccsecccceccdievecsussedescovdsevereccaadeceucsssveshiececcessonssduedadecedadedevadedeaasadenccucasausedvaeees 98 Canceling a print JOD a case roc aaa aga ves dca a a eases aaa A aa aa Taa a E Ea a DAAA a e e st eaa DAAA DE Teie ELE 98 COPYING iocaceroacestice vacesiicascacesioanerctveaussensudens ease sdee cass vane ease nesese norisa esis LOO Making copies meien a esae a E ae A E Aa A aa Caa a Ka E ea Ee N EAO cata tse SEa E kae atai DaI 100 COPYING 0100In o KENETET EE EEE 101 Copying On specialty MEA cs scicec seceed ninen e a e a a a a a belated ebaeteawateas 101 Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel ssssssnsseesssssssssssseseererererensesssssssssssrsreeene 102 CUSTOMIZING COPY SCTUINGS s i snc ae E E E tabs Oe tad Ma eta E A E T 103 Placing information ON COPICS c ccccccceccsssssnsnecececeecescssesseseeseeceseceseseeseeseeseeceesessessensseseeeeecesaeeseeeeesss 108 Canceling a COPy joban e e a a ducacedeeie sen a ae a E
150. ch print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting 1 2 3 1 2 3 Understanding the printer menus 227 Use To Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Off Notes Between Copies Batw enJobs e Off is the factory default setting Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Tray x Notes Multipurpose Feeder Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting Paper Saver Print multiple page images on one side of a paper Off Not
151. cons appear on the home screen Note If you clear a check box beside an icon then the icon does not appear on the home screen c Click Submit e Customize the icon for an application For more information see Finding information about the home screen applications on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application Understanding the different applications Use To Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page For more information see Setting up Card Copy on page 23 Fax Scan a document and then send it to a fax number For more information see Faxing on page 119 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen For more Ul information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 22 Multi Send Scan a document and then send it to multiple destinations For more information see Setting up Multi Send on page 24 MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen For more information see Using MyShortcut on page 23 Scan to E mail Scan a document and then send it to an e mail address For more information see E mailing on page 112 Scan to Computer Scana document and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer For more information see Setting up Scan to Computer on page 147 Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protoc
152. content 5 90 Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Text Default 5 90 Text Photo Default 5 90 Photo Default 5 90 Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Specify how the images are sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Use Multi Page TIFF On Off 212 To Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Note On is the factory default setting TIFF Compression LZW JPEG Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files Note LZW is the factory default setting Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x E mail Bit D
153. could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties e Do not use labels with exposed adhesive e Before loading labels on the tray flex and fan labels to loosen them Straighten the edges on a level surface Tips on using letterhead e Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers e Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Before loading letterhead flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together e Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead Printing Printable side Paper orientation Trays One sided Facedown Load the sheet with the top edge toward the front of the tray Trays Two sided Faceup Load the sheet with the bottom edge entering the printer first Multipurpose feeder One sided Faceup Load the sheet with the top edge entering the printer first Multipurpose feeder Two sided Facedown Load the sheet with the bottom edge entering the printer first Note Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers eee eee Paper and specialty media guide 85 Tips on using transparencies From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the transparencies loaded in the tray Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities e Use transparenc
154. ction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Learning about the printer 9 Learning about the printer Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available at Connecting the printer http support lexmark com Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide and Quick Reference Guide The guides are e Selecting and storing paper and specialty media available on the Documentation CD Loading paper Note These guides are also available in other Configuring printer settings OR AREA e Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software e Configuring the printer on a network e Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility Lexmark Accessibility Guide This guide is available at features of your printer http support lexmark com Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software progr
155. ctional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated USB Buffer Set the size of the USB input buffer Disabled Notes Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes e The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 K increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers e The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus Use Job Buffering Off On Auto Mac Binary PS On Off Auto ENA Address YYY YYY YYY YVY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YVY VVY ENA Gateway YYY YYY YYY YYY 173 To Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default s
156. ctrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following e Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 100 post consumer waste content e Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world e Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer Paper and specialty media guide 87 e Thickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray e Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper e Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated e Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de ink and dea
157. d earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed Fuser Units Transfer Transport Units Paper Feed items if any and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a Life Warning or Scheduled Maintenance message for such item Notices 379 To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances As part of your warranty service and or replacement Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and or unauthorized products s
158. d from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors Available internal options e Memory card DDR3 DIMM Flash memory e Fonts e Firmware cards Forms barcode PRESCRIBE IPDS Printcryption e Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP Parallel 1284 B interface MarkNet N8350 802 11 b g n wireless printer server MarkNet N8130 10 100 fiber interface RS 232 C serial interface Accessing the controller board Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver Additional printer setup 28 CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer 1 Open the controller board access cover 2 Using a screwdriver loosen the screws on the controller board shield Additional printer setup 29 3 Remove the shield 4 Use the following ill
159. default setting Bin x appears only when at least one optional bin is installed Specify the number of copies for the copy job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Header Footer Specify header and footer information and its location on the page Location For the location select from the following options Off e Top left Date Time Top middle Page number Top right Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Bottom left Bottom middle Bottom right Notes e Off is the factory default setting for the location e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Overlay Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Off Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Custom Overlay Allow priority copies On Off Specify the custom overlay text Note A maximum of 64 characters is allowed Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning On Off Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Background Rem
160. dem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit la d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all res
161. dministrator s Guide where to find 265 Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide where to find 246 emission notices 366 370 371 375 376 Empty the hole punch box 299 emptying the hole punch box 250 encrypting the printer hard disk 245 enlarging a copy 105 envelopes loading 75 tips on using 83 environmental settings conserving supplies 238 Eco Mode 239 Hibernate mode 240 printer display brightness adjusting 240 Quiet Mode 239 Sleep Mode 240 Erase Temporary Data Files menu 182 erasing hard disk memory 244 erasing non volatile memory 244 erasing volatile memory 243 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 299 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 299 Ethernet network preparing to set up for Ethernet printing 52 Ethernet port 49 Ethernet setup preparing for an 52 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 26 EXT port 49 exterior of the printer cleaning 247 e mail canceling 116 e mail alerts low supply levels 265 paper jam 265 setting up 265 e mail function setting up 112 e mail options advanced options 118 darkness 117 message 116 original size 116 page setup 118 recipient s 116 resolution 116 Save As Shortcut 117 Send As 117 subject 116 e mail screen options 116 118 E mail Settings menu 208 e mail shortcuts creating using the Embedded Web Server 113 e mail sending using a shortcut number 114 384 using the address book 115 e mailing adding message line 115 adding sub
162. door and the front cover 10 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam open upper rear door 202 CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 277 Clearing jams 278 1 Pull down the rear door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 279 Clearing jams 3 Close the rear door 4 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clearing jams 280 1 Pull down the rear door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 281 3 Close the rear door Clearing jams 282 4 Open the rear door of the duplex area and then push the back of the standard tray 5 Press down the rear duplex flap then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull the paper out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 283 6 Insert the standard tray 7 From the printer control panel touch Done t
163. driver on page 51 To uninstall the optional trays slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom Attaching cables A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable Make sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer e The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port Additional printer setup 50 Use the To 1 EXT port Connect additional devices telephone or answering machine to the printer and the telephone line Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region Note Remove the plug to access the port 2 LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack RJ 11 DSL filter or VoIP adapter or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes 3 Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet 4 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer
164. e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Fax Name field type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 Inthe Fax Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Faxing 121 Choosing a fax connection Scenario 1 Standard telephone line Setup 1 Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line Faxing 122 To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack Tips for this setup e You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On or manually Auto Answer Off e If you want to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings that you want Setup 2 Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine Connected to the same telephone wall jack To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack 3 Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer Faxing 123 Connected to different wall jacks To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the
165. e Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices 3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Unacceptable paper examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers e Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers e Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms e Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers e Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing e Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib e Multiple part forms or documents Paper and specialty media guide 88 For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com Gen
166. e US factory default setting You can increase the height in 0 01 inch increments e 356 mm is the international factory default setting You can increase the height in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction Short Edge Notes Long Edge Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Bin Setup menu Output Bin Specify the default bin Standard Bin Notes Bin x e If multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name appears only once in the menu Standard Bin is the factory default setting e x can be any number between 1 and 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed Understanding the printer menus Use Configure Bins Mailbox Link Mail Overflow Link Optional Type Assignment Overflow Bin Standard Bin Bin x Assign Type Bin Plain Paper Bin Card Stock Bin Transparency Bin Recycled Bin Labels Bin Vinyl Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin Colored Bin Light Paper Bin Heavy Paper Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom x Bin 164 To Specify configuration options for bins Notes e Mailbox is the factory default setting This treats each bin as a separate mailbox e Link configures all available bins as one large bin e Mail Overflow configures eac
167. e a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Adjusting toner darkness 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Printing 94 Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness and then click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 2 Adjust the setting and then touch Submit Printing from a flash drive or mobile device Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions
168. e factory default setting Set the printer to Hibernate mode even if there is an active Ethernet or fax connection Note Hibernate is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Timeouts Screen Timeout 15 300 Timeouts Prolong Screen Timeout On Off Timeouts Print Timeout Disabled 192 To Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the display to a Ready state Note 30 is the factory default setting Continue a specified job without returning to the home screen when the screen timeout timer expires Note Off is the factory default setting Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the rest of the job Notes 1 255 e 90 is the factory default setting e When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional Wait Timeout data before canceling a print job Disabled Notes 15 65535 e 40 is the factory default setting e Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Timeouts Set the amount of time the printer wa
169. e factory default setting Off Despeckle Remove specks from a scanned image Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Inverse Detection Recognize and make the white text on a black background editable On Note On is the factory default setting Off Auto Contrast Enhance Automatically adjust the contrast to improve OCR quality Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Recognized Languages Set the language or languages that the OCR can recognize English For each language select from the following options French Off German On Spanish Note The language is enabled by default If it is set to a value that is not in the list Italian of recognized languages English is enabled by default Portugues Danish Dutch Norwegian Swedish Finnish Hungarian Understanding the printer menus Print Settings Setup menu Printer Language PCL Emulation PS Emulation 225 Set the default printer language Notes PS Emulation is the factory default printer language Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Download Target RAM Flash Disk Job Waiting Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they On require unavailable printer options or custom settings They are Off stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information or options are obtained the st
170. e for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order e Caster base e Optional 2100 sheet tray or 550 sheet trays Printer For more information on installing a caster base or finisher see the setup documentation that came with the option Installing optional trays A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables
171. e information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 2 Ifa printer hard disk is installed then remove the printer hard disk first For more information see Removing a printer hard disk on page 44 3 Unpack the ISP kit Additional printer setup 35 ISP solution Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP 1 2 3 Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield 4 Plastic bracket 4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening a Loosen the screw b Lift the metal cover and then pull it out completely Additional printer setup 36 5 Align the posts of the plastic bracket to the holes on the controller board cage and then press the plastic bracket on the controller board cage until it clicks into place Note Make sure that the plastic bracket has latched completely and that the plastic bracket is seated firmly on the cage 6 Install the ISP on the plastic bracket Note Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the cage Additional printer setup 7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket 8 Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP Note Turn the screw clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place but do not tighten it yet
172. e printer back on Too many disks installed 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra printer hard disks 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many flash options installed 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many trays attached 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Tray x paper size unsupported Replace with a supported paper size Troubleshooting 315 Unformatted flash detected 53 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing e Format the flash memory Note If the error message remains then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced Unsupported camera mode unplug camera and change mode The camera mode does not support PictBridge Unplug the camera change the mode and plug the camera back into the printer Unsupported disk Remove the unsupported printer hard disk and then insert a supported one Unsupported option in slot x 55 1 Turn off
173. e printer fax number 5 Click Submit Faxing 135 Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Inthe Manually Set Date amp Time field enter the current date and time 4 Click Submit Note It is recommended to use the network time Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section 4 Click Submit Sending a fax You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways You can type the e mail
174. e printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy Remove the imaging unit and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace wiper Try one or more of the following Replace the fuser wiper in the printer e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 312 Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk From the printer control panel touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs Scan document too long The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job Scanner automatic feeder cover open Close the ADF cover Scanner disabled by admin 840 01 Print without the scanner or contact yo
175. e scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt ZS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt Letter gt S gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides Copying 105 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Sides Duplex gt select the preferred duplexing method Note For the preferred duplexing method the first number represents sides of the original documents while the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 2 sided to 2 sided if you have two sided original documents and you want two sided copies 4 Touch Y gt Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be scaled from 25 to 400 of the original document size
176. ead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling out the cable Additional printer setup 3 Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place 4 Remove the printer hard disk 5 Set aside the printer hard disk 45 Additional printer setup 46 Installing hardware options Order of installation A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furnitur
177. ection status of the wireless network adapter Connected Disconnected View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter Network Address View the network addresses UAA LAA Job Timeout Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled 0 10 225 seconds Notes e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e A setting value of 0 disables the timeout e fa value between 1 and 9 is selected then Invalid appears on the display and the value is not saved Banner Page Allow the printer to print a banner page Off Note Off is the factory default setting On TCP IP menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt TCP IP e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers Set Hostname Set the current TCP IP host name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Understanding the printer menus 169 Use aI IP Address View or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask View or change the current TCP IP netmask Gateway View or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP S
178. ectory list 98 printing a document 93 printing a font sample list 98 printing a menu settings page 56 printing a network setup page 57 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 97 from Windows 97 printing forms 93 printing from a flash drive 94 printing from a mobile device 96 printing slows down 326 publications where to find 9 Push Button Configuration method using 54 Q Quality menu 228 Quiet Mode 239 R Reattach bin x 307 Reattach bins x y 308 recipient s e mail options 116 recycled paper using 86 238 recycling Lexmark packaging 241 Lexmark products 241 toner cartridges 241 reducing acopy 105 reducing noise 239 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 308 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy 308 Remote Operator Panel setting up 25 Remove defective disk 61 308 Remove packaging material area name 309 Remove paper from linked set bin name 309 Remove paper from all bins 309 Remove paper from bin x 309 Remove paper from standard output bin 309 removing printer hard disk 44 repeat print jobs 96 printing from a Macintosh computer 97 printing from Windows 97 390 repeating defects appear on prints 341 Replace all originals if restarting job 309 Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy 309 Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy 309 Replace imaging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy 310 Replace jam
179. ed Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x 153 Specify the paper size loaded in each tray Notes Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting e If two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have the same settings then the trays are automatically linked The multipurpose feeder may also be linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose feeder Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays e If available a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x e Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu pT a O a EE E E a E E e E Understanding the printer menus MP Feeder Size A4 AS A6 JIS BS Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope MP Feeder Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x
180. eive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically e If you have only one telephone number on your line then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually Auto Answer Off When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones press 9 or the manual answer code on the telephone to receive the fax e You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On but you need to turn off the voice mail service when you are expecting a fax This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax Scenario 2 Digital Subscriber Line DSL A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels voice and Internet Telephone and fax signals travel through the voice channel and Internet signals pass through the other channel This way you can use the same line for analog voice calls including faxes and digital Internet access Faxing 126 To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection you need to install a DSL filter for the analog devices fax machine telephone answering machine in your network Interference causes noise and static on the telephone failed and poor quality faxes for the printer and slow Internet connection on your computer To install a filter for the printer 1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack 2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the 4 p
181. el set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight from the menu to match the paper loaded in the tray tray settings to match the paper loaded in the Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in tray the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Remove the paper from the tray and then turn it over b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package support Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Na Printer is printing blank pages Troubleshooting Action Step 1 a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Checkifthe packing material is properly removed from the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Yes Go to ste
182. eld Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Reports 3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Block No Name Fax Notes e This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name In the Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want to block Faxing 140 Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Pageand Finish the Job appear Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 Onthe home screen touch Cancel Jobs
183. ellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 IKEv1 implemented in the product or service Index Index Numerics 2100 sheet tray loading 68 550 sheet tray installing 46 Symbols x page jam open upper rear door 202 277 x page jam clear manual feeder 250 286 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 273 x page jam open automatic feeder top cover 28y xx 290 x page jam open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 4yy xx 287 x page jam open tray x 24x 285 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 279 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 4yy xx 291 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 292 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 283 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 284 A accessing the Enbedded Web Server 20 Active NIC menu 166 adapter plug 129 adding hardware options print driver 51 ADF copying using 100 adjusting copy quality 105 adjusting printer display brightness 240 adjusting Sleep mode 240 adjusting toner darkness 93 administrator settings Embedded Web Server 265 advanced options copy options 111 e mail options 118 fax options 143 FTP options 150 answering machine setting up 121 AppleTalk menu 171 applications home screen 22 understanding 21 at
184. emember You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable Additional printer setup 53 Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network Notes e Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter e Make sure your access point wireless router is turned on and is working properly Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network e ssiD The SSID is also referred to as the network name e Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc e Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select e Security Method There are four basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key then enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of secur
185. enne dont le type et le gain maximal ou inf rieur ont t approuv s par Industrie Canada Pour r duire les interf rences radio potentielles aupr s d autres utilisateurs le type d antenne et son gain doivent tre choisis de telle sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonn e quivalente PIRE ne soit pas sup rieure a ce qui est n cessaire pour assurer la r ussite de la communication Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d Industrie Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas causer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toutes les interf rences y compris les interf rences pouvant entrainer un fonctionnement ind sirable Pour viter toute interf rence radio au service sous licence cet appareil est destin a tre utilis a l int rieur et a l cart des fen tres afin d assurer une protection maximale Notice to users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Compliance
186. epth 1 bit 8 bit Enable printing of a transmission log after each e mail job Note Print log is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify the bin for e mail logs Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting e Bin x appears only when at least one optional bin is installed Enable the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning On Off Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed Scan Preview On Off Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed Save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail Destination screen Background Removal 4to4 ee Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color
187. er Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQHHTXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack Notices 372 A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply wit
188. er Test Print a report that confirms whether the staple finisher is functioning properly Note This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Network x Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers and when there is more than one network option installed Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Notes e This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu e This menu is supported only in some printer models Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Notes e This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu e This menu is supported only in some printer models Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts Print a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information abou
189. er orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 305 From the printer control panel touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray e Cancel the print job Load staples Try one or more of the following Replace or insert the staple cartridge in the finisher For instructions on inserting or replacing a staple cartridge in the finisher touch More information on the printer control panel From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing From the printer control panel touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Maintenance kit low 80 xy You may need to order a maintenance kit For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message If necessary touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message If necessary touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy You may need to repla
190. er size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Notes e The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm 2 76 x 5 inches for one sided printing and 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 inches for two sided duplex printing e The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches for one sided and two sided printing e When printing on paper less than 210 mm 8 3 inches wide the printer may print at a reduced speed after a period of time to ensure the best print performance 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 3 Select the width or height and then touch Submit Loading the 550 sheet tray A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray Notes e When loading folio legal or Oficio size paper lift the tray slightly and then pull it out completely e Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam Loading paper and specialty media 59 Loading paper and specialty media 60 2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place Note Use the paper size indic
191. er than the specified maximum size are not sent 0 65535 KB E mail Server Setup Send a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit Size Error Message E mail Server Setup Specify a domain name such as a company domain name and then limit e mail Limit destinations destinations only to that domain name Notes e E mail can be sent only to the specified domain e The limit is one domain E mail Server Setup Define the e mail server Web link settings Web Link Setup Note The characters lt gt are invalid entries for a path name Server Login Password Path File Name Web Link Format Specify the file format PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps RTF rtf TXT txt PDF Settings Configure the PDF settings PDF Version Notes 1 2 1 7 A la e 1 5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version A 1b e Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression This menu item PDF Compression appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed Normal e Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF Secure High PDF requires you to enter your password twice Secure PDF Off On Searchable PDF Off On aae Understanding the printer menus Use Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo 210 To Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory de
192. eral sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality e For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 percent Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 24 C 65 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent Store paper in cartons on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor e Store individual packages on a flat surface e Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages e Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean dry and flat Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes types and weights of paper they support Note For an unlisted paper size select the closest larger listed size Paper sizes supported by the printer Note When printing on paper less than 210 mm 8 3 inches wide the printer may print at a reduced speed after a period of time to ensure the best print performance Paper size Dimensions 550 sheet tray 2100 sheettray Multipurpose Duplex ADF Scanner feeder glass 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 in 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 in A6 105 x 148 mm 4 1 x 5
193. es 2 Up 3 Up Off is the factory default setting 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Paper Saver Horizontal Notes Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical e Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and Landscape landscape Portrait Paper Saver Border Print a border when using Paper Saver None Note None is the factory default setting Solid Staple Job Specify whether printed output is stapled Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed nn SSE AAA Understanding the printer menus 228 Use To Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly Note This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Hole Punch Specify whether holes will be created on printed outputs for the purpose of collecting On the sheets in a binder or folder Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a supported staple hole pu
194. es 49 original size e mail options 116 scan options 148 output file type changing 115 scan image 149 output options supported paper sizes 90 supported paper types and weights 90 P page setup e mail options 118 fax options 142 scan options 150 paper characteristics 85 different sizes copying 103 letterhead 86 preprinted forms 86 recycled 86 saving 107 selecting 86 storing 85 88 unacceptable 86 Universal size setting 58 387 using recycled 238 Paper changes needed 307 paper characteristics 85 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 322 paper jams avoiding 268 paper jams clearing behind rear door 279 duplex 284 in automatic document feeder top cover 290 in mailbox rear door 287 in manual feeder 286 in stapler door 291 in tray x 285 inside the printer 273 standard bin jam 283 upper rear door 277 Paper Loading menu 160 paper size setting 58 Paper Size Type menu 153 paper sizes supported by the printer 88 Paper Texture menu 156 paper type setting 58 paper types supported by printer 90 Paper Weight menu 158 paper weights supported by printer 90 Parallel x menu 173 Parallel port x disabled 56 307 parts checking status 251 checking from printer control panel 251 checking using the Embedded Web Server 251 using genuine Lexmark 252 PCL Emul menu 232 PDF menu 231 Personal Identification Number method using 54 phone splitter 126 photos copying 101 Index pl
195. es the Select Paper Feed command This selection appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter e 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder Tray Renumber Restore Defaults Yes No Return all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Understanding the printer menus 235 HTML menu Use aK Font Name Joanna MT Set the default font for HTML documents Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not Antique Olive Lubalin Graph specify a font Apple Chancery Marigold Arial MT Monalisa Recut Avant Garde Monaco Bodoni New CenturySbk Bookman New York Chicago Optima Clarendon Oxford Cooper Black Palatino Copperplate StempelGaramond Coronet Taffy Courier Times Eurostile TimesNewRoman Garamond Univers Geneva Zapf Chancery Gill Sans NewSansMTCS Goudy NewSansMTCT Helvetica New SansMTJA Hoefler Text NewSansMTKO Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Font Size Set the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes 12 ptis the factory default setting Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scale the default font for HTML documents 1 400 Notes e 100 is the factory default setting e Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Orientation Set the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Note Portrait is
196. eset factory security defaults e No Effect means the reset has no effect on the printer security configuration Access controls No Security retains all the security information that the user has defined No Security is the factory default setting e Reset factory security defaults deletes all security information that the user has defined and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous Security menu ee Understanding the printer m Use LDAP Certificate Verification Demand Try Allow Never Minimum PIN Length 1 16 enus 181 To Allow the user to request a server certificate Notes e Demand is the factory default setting This means a server certificate is requested If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided then the session is terminated immediately e Try means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided then the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided then the session is terminated immediately e Allow means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided then the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally e Never means no server certificate is requested Limit the digit length of the personal identification number PIN Note 4 is the factory default setting Confidential Pri
197. essage and continue printing without using the indicated bin Troubleshooting 301 Incompatible tray x 59 Try one or more of the following Remove the indicated tray From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the indicated tray Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel e Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings e Check if the paper size is correctly set For example if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed e Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray e Cancel the print job Insert hole punch box Insert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Insert staple cartridge Try one or more of the following Insert a staple cartridge Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher Insert Tray x Try one or more of the following Insert the specified tray into the printer e Cancel the print job e Reset
198. esses by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Forms and Favorites 3 Click Add and then customize the settings Notes e See the mouse over help beside each field for a description of the setting e To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookmark is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 e Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or descripti
199. ession E mail address amp Password Prompt User Device Userid Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain 179 To Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Notes None is the factory default setting for Device Initiated E mail and User Initiated E mail Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected Security menu Edit Security Setups menu Use aie Edit Backup Password Create a backup password Use Backup Password Notes e Off T e Offis the factory default setting for Use Backup Password n arene F Pascword This menu item appears only if a backup password exists Edit Building Blocks Edit settings for Internal Accounts NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Internal Accounts Active Directory LDAP Password and PIN NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Active Directory LDAP LDAP GSSAPI Password PIN Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template list of available templates Understanding the printer menus 180 Use To Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access Administrative Menus points Function Access Management Solutions Cancel jobs at the Device Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
200. etten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden KINAYNOS EkAvon aopatns aktiwoBoAias laser kata tnv adaipEon Twv KACETWV Kar tnv anaop ion Ths HavSdAWOns Anope yete tnv EKBEON otnv aktwvo o ia laser VESZ LY Nem l that l zersugarzas fordulhat eld a patronok elt vol t sakor s a zardszerkezet felbont sakor Kertilje a l zersugarnak val kitetts get PERICOLO Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione al raggio laser FARE Usynlig laserstraling nar kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering for laserstralen NIEBEZPIECZE STWO niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady Nale y unika na wietlenia promieniem lasera ONACHO Hesugumoe na3epHoe n3nyyeHne Npr N3BNEYEHHbIX KapTPUAYKAX n cHaTnn 6noknpoBkKn VU36eralite BO3Ae CTBNA NazepHbIx Nyye Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om PELIGRO Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser FARA Osynlig laserstralning n r patroner tas ur och sp rrmekanismen r upph vd Undvik exponering f r laserstr len ER YR ERARRMNAT EETILINE TEASE TERBORIER Fo JERR IRIRE BC TB Bd BAER LEN TRE eRe CE EINER TF ER 2 rY yE Iin Ay ABERE WARE F
201. etting e On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk e Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol Set the network address information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Parallel x menu Note This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed Use PCL SmartSwitch On off To Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes Onis the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The
202. ext file with no formatting E mailing 118 Page Setup This option lets you change the following settings e Sides Duplex This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail e Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed Using the advanced options Select from the following settings e Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you e mail the document e Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving not
203. fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder 4 Slide the paper guide until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper 5 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 4yy xx 1 Open the rear mailbox door firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 288 2 Close the rear mailbox door 3 If the jam is in the mailbox bin then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 289 4 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing Clearing jams 290 x page jam open automatic feeder top cover 28y xx 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray Note The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray 2 Open the ADF cover R 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the ADF cover 5 Open the scanner cover 6 Ifthe jam is in the bottom ADF door or ADF exit bin then open the bottom ADF door and then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 291
204. fault setting Disable the SysStart file Note Off is the factory default setting Lock PS Startup Mode On Off Establish the font search order Font Priority Resident Flash Disk Notes Resident is the factory default setting e This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly e Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected e Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 PCL Emul menu Font Source Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu Resident Notes Disk Download e Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of Flash fonts downloaded in the RAM All e Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read write or password protected e Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM e All shows all fonts available to any option Font Name Identify a specific font and where it is stored Courier 10 Note Courier 10 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Symbol Set 10U PC 8 12U PC 850 233 To Specify the symbol set for each font name Notes e 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting e A symbol set is a set
205. fault setting Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Color off On Resolution 75 dpi 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness 1 9 Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color Note On is the factory default setting Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Portrait Landscape Specify the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting ee Understanding the printer menus Use Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Difficult Media Letter Difficult Media A5 Difficult Media Legal Difficult Media A4 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Sides Duplex Off Long Edge Short Edge 211 To Specify the size of the original document Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Specify the orientation of the original document loaded in the ADF for two sided scanning Note Off is the factory default setting JPEG Quality Best for
206. from the list 4 Update the IP address 5 Apply the changes For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to the list of printers and then select gt IP 2 Type the IP address in the address field 3 Apply the changes Setting up serial printing Windows only After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer Note Serial printing reduces print speed 1 Set the parameters in the printer a From the control panel navigate to the menu for the port settings b Locate the menu for the serial port settings and then adjust the settings if necessary c Save the settings 2 From your computer open the printers folder and then select your printer 3 Open the printer properties and then select the COM port from the list 4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager Use the Run dialog box to open the command prompt and then type devmgmt msc Verifying printer setup When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following e Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and then install it again e Network setup page If your printer has Ethernet or
207. from the printer Embedded Web Server eSF Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number that matches the recipient type Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax Off On Banned Fax List Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID specified Note Off is the factory default setting Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Enable the printer to hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time Note Off is the factory default setting 205 Understanding the printer menus Use Punch Off On Staple Off 1 staple Enable Color Fax Receive On Off Fax Log Settings Use Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Le Specify whether prints are punched Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether prints are stapled Note Off is the factory default setting Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale Note On is the factory default setting To Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job Note Print log is the factory default setting Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Auto Print Logs On Off Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Log
208. fully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Off is the factory default setting This setting prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Determine how the printer while in idle state reacts to a short press of the Sleep button Note Sleep is the factory default setting Determine how the printer while in idle state reacts to a long press of the Sleep button Note Do Nothing is the factory default setting Factory Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Export Configuration File Export Copy Settings menu Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo Set all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings Notes Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Restore Now deletes all downloads stored in RAM Downloads stored in the flash memory are not affected Export the printer configuration file to a flash drive Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other 194 To Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Sides Duplex 1 sided to 1 sided
209. g e Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image e Graphics The original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Copying 106 5 Touch Sa 6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying e Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer e Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Magazine The original document is from a magazine e Press The original document was printed using a printing press Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Photo Film The original document is a photo from a film Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper e Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer 7 Touch oS gt Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print the copies as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated alg 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media s
210. gh Cotton is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 1 and 2 Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation Envelope Rough Envelope e Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Width 1 8 5 inches 25 216 mm Height 1 25 inches 25 635 mm Orientation Portrait Landscape 2 scans per side Off On Custom Bin Names menu Use a Ke Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin Bin x Specify a custom name for Bin x Understanding the printer menus 163 Universal Setup menu Use Ae Units of Measure Identify the units of measure Inches Notes Millimeters Inches is the US factory default setting e Millimeters is the international factory default setting Portrait Width Set the portrait width 3 8 5 inches Notes 76 216 mm e If the width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed e 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting You can increase the width in 0 01 inch increments e 216 mm is the international factory default setting You can increase the width in 1 mm increments Portrait Height Set the portrait height 3 14 17 inches Notes 76 360 mm e Ifthe height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed e 14 inches is th
211. ging unit exposed to direct light for an extended period of time Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 5 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover Maintaining the printer 258 Replacing the imaging unit 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door Maintaining the printer 259 2 Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle 3 Lift the green handle and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer Maintaining the printer 260 4 Unpack the new imaging unit and then shake it ll Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 5 Remove all packing material from the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer Maintaining the printer 261 7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer 8 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover Maintaining the printer 262 Replacing a staple cartridge 1 Open the stapler door 2 Pull down the latch
212. gs Log File Prefix Specify the e mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs Specify the prefix you want for the log file name Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log file prefix Utilities menu Use Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All _OO Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Notes Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected e Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory Understanding the printer menus Use Format Flash Yes No 231 To Format the flash memory Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted Notes e Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory e No cancels the format request e Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected This menu item appears only when a non defective flash memory card is installed Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete Activate Hex Trace Delete downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Note
213. h bin as a separate mailbox e Link Optional links together all available bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed e Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a bin or linked bin set Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting e If multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name only appears once in the bin list e x can be any number between 1 and 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed Select a bin for each supported paper type For each type select from the following options Disabled Standard Bin Bin x Notes Disabled is the factory default setting e x can be any number between 1 and 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed e If multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name appears only once in the bin list Understanding the printer menus Reports menu Reports menu Use Menu Settings Page Device Statistics 165 O Print a report on the current printer menu settings The report also contains information about the status of the supplies and a list of hardware options that are successfully installed Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and the number of printed pages Stapl
214. h package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark From the printer control panel change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on Go to step 6 Go to step 5 The problem is solved Step 6 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the print still too dark Contact customer support The problem is solved Troubleshooting Print is too light Action Step 1 a Fromthe Quality menu onthe printer control panel increase the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Step 4 Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Go to step 4 From the printer control panel change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the p
215. h the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to atelephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQHHTXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect
216. he File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported Printing 96 Recommended flash drives File type Lexar JumpDrive FireFly 512MB and 1GB Documents e SanDisk Cruzer Micro 512MB and 1GB e pdf e Sony Micro Vault Classic 512MB and 1GB xps Images e dcx e gif e jpeg or jpg e bmp e pcx e tiff or tif e png e fls Printing from a mobile device To download a compatible mobile printing application visit www lexmark com mobile Note Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to BH gt Security gt Confidential Print gt select the print job type Use To Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 1 9 Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfact
217. he e mail options Recipient s This option lets you enter the recipient of your e mail You may enter multiple e mail addresses Subject This option lets you type a subject line for your e mail Message This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name Original Size This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e mail When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Resolution This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size Content This option lets you set the original document type and source E mailing 117 Select from the following content types Graphics The original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Select from the following content sources Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer Color Laser
218. he following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see Using Eco Mode on page 239 Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for i use in laser LED printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 86 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports two sided printing then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper Notes e Two sided printing is the default setting in the print driver e For a complete list of supported products and countries go to http support lexmark com Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by setting multiple page printing N Up for the print job Saving money and the environment 239 Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document e Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Avoid paper jam
219. he manufacturer s authorized replacement Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Moving the printer to another location The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions e Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer e Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options Keep the printer in an upright position e Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Managing the printer 265 Managing the printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide at http support lexmark com Checking the virtual display 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web p
220. he printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber pulsing pattern Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode completely off for 1 9 seconds in a slow The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Touch 1 Change Language ae Launch the Change Language pop up window that lets you change the primary language of the printer 2 Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies 3 Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax 4 E mail Access the E mail menus and send e mails 5 FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server 6 Arrows Scroll up or down 7 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms 8 Menu icon Access the printer menus Note The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state Understanding the printer control panel 17 Touch L 9 Bookmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URL into a tree view of folders and file links
221. he setting is changed from the control panel Job Buffering Off On Auto Mac Binary PS On Off Auto Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Note Auto is the factory default setting Standard Network Setup OR Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Show and set the printer network settings Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network Understanding the printer menus 168 Reports menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Reports e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Reports Use ae Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Network Card e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Network Card Use To View Card Status View the conn
222. her then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur XR One sided printing Two sided printing A Loading paper and specialty media e Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 5 Insert the tray Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray 74 Loading paper and specialty media 75 6 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door Note Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing Loading paper and specialty media 2 Using the handle pull the multipurpose feeder extender 76 Loading paper and specialty media 77 Note Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open 3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides Loading paper and specialty media 78 4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading Flex the sheets b
223. hing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log e Multifeed Sensor This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time and then displays an error message Note This option is supported only in select printer models Faxing 119 Faxing Note Fax capabilities are available only in some printer models Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Setting up the printer to fax CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Notes The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions During the initial printer setup clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later and then touch Continue The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Faxing 120 Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to
224. his device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of Notices 373 an interface may consist of any combi
225. ide of the tray For more information see the Loading paper and specialty media section of the User s Guide Clearing jams 270 Allow the paper to enter the optional mailbox bins properly e Make sure to adjust the bin extender so that the paper size indicators match the size of the paper used Notes Ifthe bin extender is shorter than the size of the paper you are printing on then the paper causes a jam in the mailbox bin For example if you are printing on a legal size paper and the bin extender is set to letter size then a jam occurs Ifthe bin extender is longer than the size of the paper you are printing on then the edges become uneven and the paper is not stacked properly For example if you are printing on a letter size paper and the bin extender is set to legal size then the paper does not stack properly Clearing jams 271 If paper needs to be returned to the mailbox bin then insert the paper under the bin arm and then push the paper all the way back Note If the paper is not under the bin arm then a jam occurs due to an overfilled bin Use recommended paper Use only recommended paper or specialty media Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex fan and straighten paper or specialty media before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same tray Make sure the paper size and type are set c
226. ies designed specifically for laser printers e Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems Before loading transparencies flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together e When printing on large volumes of transparencies make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval of at least three minutes between batches to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin You can also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20 Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these factors before printing on them Weight The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib grain long paper The 2100 sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60 135 g m 16 36 lb grain long paper Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly and may cause jams Note Two sided printing is supported for 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding prob
227. ight comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Header Footer gt select where you want to place the header or footer gt select the type of header or footer you want 4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected and then touch Done 5 Touch ZS and then press el Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy Custom and Draft 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Copying 109 Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Overlay gt select overlay message gt Done gt Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass From the home screen
228. immediately after the last successful scan job e Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job e Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job Troubleshooting 311 Replace maintenance kit 0 estimated pages remain 80 xy The printer is scheduled for maintenance For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact your service representative and then report the message Replace missing fuser 80 xx 1 Install the missing fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Replace roller kit 81 xx Try one or more of the following Replace the roller kit For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the part From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing Replace separator pad Try one or more of the following e Replace the separator pad For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply From the printer control panel touch Ignore to clear the message Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy Remove the toner cartridge and then install a supported one to clear the message and continu
229. in the Installed Features list Step 2 Check the cable and the ISP connection a Use the correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the ISP b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the receptacle of the controller board Note The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the controller board are color coded Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly Mi Yes The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved 319 No Contact customer support a Check if you have a supported ISP Note An ISP from another printer may not work on this printer Contact customer support Tray problems Action Step 1 a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following e Check for paper jams or misfeeds Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray e If you are printing on custom size paper then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper e Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray b Check if the tray closes properly Is the tray working Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Troubleshooting Action Step 2 a Turn off the printer then wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Re
230. ings e Sides Duplex This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper e Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Using the advanced options Select from the following settings e Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you scan the document e Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log e Multifeed Sensor This detects when the ADF picks more than one
231. ining fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Selecting paper Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality e Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended printable side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same tray mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead e Use grain long for 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib paper e Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process e Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces e Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities This determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality e When in doubt contact your paper supplier Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser ele
232. ining pages The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors such as actual document content print quality settings and other printer settings The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing consumption Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer the estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5 coverage per page Ordering a toner cartridge Notes The estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5 coverage per page Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield Return Program cartridge Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 24B6020 Ordering a maintenance kit To identify the supported fuser type view the label on the fuser Do either of the following e Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit The two digit fuser type code such as 00 or 01 can be seen on the front of the fuser Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems e Pull down the printer rear door The two digit fuser type code such as 00 or 01 can be
233. inistrators are automatically off notified of certain log events This setting can have one or more e mail a addresses separated by commas n s itv of TRON e Digitally sign exports determines if the printer automatically signs each EVENIEV OT EKENES O06 exported security log Off is the factory default setting 0 7 d e Severity of events to log records the severity value of each event 4 is the Remote Syslog non logged events factory default setting No u i e Remote Syslog non logged events determines if the printer sends events to Yes the remote server that have a severity level greater than the value of the E mail log cleared alert Severity of events to log setting No is the factory default setting No e E mail log cleared alert determines if the printer sends an e mail to the Yes administrator every time a log is deleted through the printer control panel or E mail log wrapped alert EWS No is the factory default setting No e E mail log wrapped alert determines if the printer sends the administrator Yes an e mail when log entries are wrapping No is the factory default setting E mail full alert E mail full alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an No e mail when the log fills a certain amount of its allotted space No is the Yes factory default setting full alert level e full alert level determines if the space occupied by log equals or exceeds 1 99 the va
234. int job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting e If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu Understanding the printer menus 167 Use aI PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it On regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting If PS SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Off communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Auto Notes Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Auto is the factory default setting The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel Set the size of the network input buffer Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers The printer automatically restarts when t
235. inter A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options then leave enough room for them also It is important to Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Clean dry and free of dust Away from stray staples and paper clips Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations 15 6 t0 327 C 60 to 90 Storage temperature 1 to 35 C 34 to 95 F Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation Learning about the printer Right side Front 150 mm 6 in 394 mm 15 5 in wu Pl _ wl n e Left side Rear Top 150 mm 6 in 150 mm 6 in 150 mm 6 in 11 Learning about the printer Printer configurations Basic model Automatic document feeder ADF ADF tray ADF bin 4 bin mailbox Standard bin Multipurpo
236. inter home screen e You can use the shortcut when e mailing another document using the same settings E mailing 114 E mailing a document You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the home screen For more information see Activating the home screen applications on page 22 Sending an e mail using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides Note To avoid a cropped image make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s 4 Type the e mail address or press using the keypad and then enter the shortcut number Notes To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add e You can also enter an e mail address using the address book 5 Touch Done g
237. is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a service representative A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifun
238. is sets up the cover page of copies and booklets Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Header Footer This inserts date or time page number Bates number or custom text and then prints them in the specified header or footer location Margin Shift This increases or reduces the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image Touch or to set the margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy is cropped Overlay This creates a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose from Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field The word you pick appears faintly in large print across each page Paper Saver This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up printing where N stands for the number of pages Separator Sheets This places a blank sheet of paper between copies pages or print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Multifeed Sensor This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time and then displays an erro
239. isten for a dial tone Setup 2 Printer is connected to a wall jack cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility LINE 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer Scenario 5 Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the printer The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ 11 Your printer comes with the RJ 11 jack and a telephone cable with the RJ 11 plug Faxing 130 If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection then you need to use a telephone adapter An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer and you may need to purchase it separately f There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer Part name Part number Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519 Faxing 131 Connecting the printer to a non RJ 11 wall jack LINE 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the p
240. it is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use File Name 221 To Enter a base file name Custom Job Scanning On Off Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed Scan Preview On Off Background Removal 4to4 Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enable an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Create a negati
241. its for user intervention Job Hold Timeout before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and 5 255 continues to print other jobs in the print queue Error Recovery Auto Reboot Reboot when idle Reboot always Reboot never Error Recovery Max Auto Reboots 1 20 Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Notes e 30 is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Set the printer to restart when an error occurs Note Reboot always is the factory default setting Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can perform Note 2 is the factory default setting Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when these are not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Print Recovery Jam Recovery On Off Auto 193 To Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks Print Recovery Jam Assist On Off Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper Note On is the factory default setting Print Recovery Page Protect Off On Press Sleep Button Do Nothing Sleep Hibernate Press and Hold Sleep Button Do Nothing Sleep Hibernate Success
242. ity The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network 802 1X RADIUS If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network then you may need the following e Authentication type e Inner authentication type e 802 1X user name and password e Certificates No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network Notes If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter and then look for the network name If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact your system support person To find the WPA WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network see the documentation that came with the access point see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point or consult your system support person Additional printer setup 54 Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard Before you begin make sure that e A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter
243. ity and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system e The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Do either of the following e Click Set up Scan to Network gt Click here e Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Scan to Network 3 Specify the destinations and then customize the settings Notes See the mouse over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting e To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 e Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically ne
244. ject line 115 configuring e mail settings 112 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 113 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 113 setting up e mail function 112 using a shortcut number 114 using the address book 115 using the printer control panel 114 F factory defaults restoring 267 fax sending 137 sending at a scheduled time 137 fax and e mail functions setting up 356 fax and e mail functions are not set up 356 fax log viewing 139 Fax memory full 299 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 198 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 206 fax name setting 134 fax number setting 134 fax options advanced options 143 content source 142 content type 142 darkness 141 delayed send 142 page setup 142 resolution 141 scan preview 142 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 299 fax port 49 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 300 fax setup country or region specific 129 digital telephone service 128 DSL connection 125 Index standard telephone line connection 121 VoIP 126 Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator 300 Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator 300 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 352 can receive but not send faxes 354 can send but not receive faxes 355 cannot send or receive a fax 352 received fax has poor print quality 356 faxing blocking junk faxes 139 canceling
245. k International Inc LEX M03 002 z A11 0160001JP Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite l utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n2 de r f rence Lexmark 80D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz F r dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zahlzeichenubertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 80D1877 f r jede Leitung installiert werden ber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera E necessario utilizzare il filtro poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union
246. kage Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 b Resend the print job Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 5 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Contact customer support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative The problem is solved Toner fog or background shading appears on prints Action Step 1 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 b Resend the print job Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Troubleshooting 346 Action Step 2 The problem is solved C
247. kit 40X8431 Ordering an imaging unit Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner For more information on replacing the imaging unit see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Part name Lexmark Return Program Imaging unit 24B6025 Maintaining the printer 254 Ordering staple cartridges Part number Staple cartridges 25A0013 Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to e Direct sunlight e Temperatures above 35 C 95 F e High humidity above 80 e Salty air e Corrosive gases e Heavy dust Maintaining the printer 255 Replacing supplies Replacing the toner cartridge 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door Maintaining the printer 256 2 Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle 3 Unpack the new toner cartridge then remove the packing material and then shake the cartridge to redistribute ue aS 4 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer Note Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in Maintaining the printer 257 Warning Potential Damage When replacing a toner cartridge do not leave the ima
248. ks are the property of their respective owners AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device u
249. l with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor up to 80 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s product list for special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as th
250. ld Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Network Ports gt Wireless 3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point wireless router Note Make sure to enter the correct SSID security method preshared key or passphrase network mode and channel 4 Click Submit 5 Turn off the printer and then disconnect the Ethernet cable Then wait for at least five seconds and then turn the printer back on 6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network print a network setup page Then in the Network Card x section see if the status is Connected Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP Notes e Ifthe printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes f the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address then you do not need to make any changes e f you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder 2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP open the printer properties Additional printer setup 56 3 Configure the port
251. lems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Paper and specialty media guide 86 Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper grain long paper is recommended Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper conta
252. lenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir pvi a essi vara er samr mi vid grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 K
253. lete Current Log Log Near Full Level Off 1 99 Determine and set how often a log file is created Note Monthly is the factory default setting Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires Note None is the factory default setting Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log Action at Near Full Note 5 is the factory default setting ee Understanding the printer menus Use Log Action at Near Full None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current 230 To Determine and set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full Notes e None is the factory default setting The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered Log Action at Full None E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current URL to Post Logs Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit 100MB Note None is the factory default setting Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs E mail Address to Send Lo
254. lia New Zealand Latin America Africa Middle East rest of Europe oly ny AIU INJ e Invalid Notes e The x and y values represent xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel e The xand y values must match for printing to continue Replace imaging unit 0 estimated pages remain 84 xy Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace jammed originals if restarting job Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job e Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job e Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job e Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job e Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job Try one or more of the following e Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job e Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF
255. llow is the factory default setting Don t Allow Caller ID Specify the type of caller ID being used Off Primary Alternate Fax number masking Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Off Notes From left From right e Off is the factory default setting e The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask setting Digits to Mask Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number 0 58 Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 199 Fax Cover Page Configure the fax cover page Fax Cover Page Off by default On by default Never use Notes e Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page e Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items Always use Include to Field On Off Include from Field On Off From Include Message Field On Off Message Include Logo On Off Include Footer x On Off Footer x Fax Send Settings Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specify quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives better print quality but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Note Standard is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5
256. ls such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Notices 380 Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQ
257. lt custom type Paper name or a user defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server Card Stock or from MarkVision Professional Transparency Notes Rough Cotton iow e Paper is the factory default setting Vinyl Labels e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or i y i multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source nvelope Recycled Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus Paper Notes Card Stock Transparency e Paper is the factory default setting Rough Cotton e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or Labels multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Vinyl Labels Envelope Custom Name x Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces Custom Type x in the printer menus Understanding the printer menus 162 Custom Scan Sizes menu Use a Ke Custom Scan Size x Specify a custom scan size name sizes and orientation The custom scan size Scan Size Name name replaces Custom Scan Size x in the printer menus Media Type Notes ADF Media Type Plain Paper i f j Card Stock e ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3 4 5 and 6 e 8 5 inches is the U S factory default setting for Width 216 mm is the international factory default setting for Width 14 inches is the U S factory default setting for Height 356 mm is the international factory default setting for Height Rou
258. lue of the full alert level 90 is the factory default setting E mail log exported alert e E mail log exported alert determines if the printer sends the administrator No an e mail when there is a log exported No is the factory default setting Yes e E mail log settings changed alert determines if the printer sends the E mail log settings changed alert administrator an e mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log setting is No toggled No is the factory default setting Yes e Log line endings specifies how line endings will be handled in the log file depending on the operating system in which the file will be parsed or viewed Log line endings u a i LF n is the factory default setting LF n CR r CRLF r n Set Date Time menu Use aie Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time Note Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format Time Zone Select the time zone Note GMT is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Automatically Observe DST On Off 185 To Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time DST start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting Custom Time Zone Setup DST Start Week
259. ly Step 2 a Fromthe printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked Note The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked b Resend the print job Yes No Do the trays link correctly The problem is solved Go to step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer support Unexpected page breaks occur Action Increase the printing timeout a From the home screen navigate to 1 gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts b Increase the Print Timeout setting and then touch Submit c Resend the print job Did the file print correctly Yes No The problem is solved Check the original file for manual page breaks Troubleshooting Print quality problems Characters have jagged or uneven edges N ABC DEF Action Step 1 a Printafontsample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported by the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you want to use For more information contact your system support person c Resend the print job Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges Step 2 a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the f
260. m X x x x 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m J g 16 24 Ib bond Heavy paper 90 176 g m x x 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m J J 16 24 Ib bond Rough cotton 90 176 g m x x 24 47 b bond 60 90 g m J J 16 24 Ib bond Custom type x 90 176 g m x X 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m J V3 16 24 Ib bond 2 Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on using transparencies on page 85 Printing 93 Printing Printing forms and a document Printing forms Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed Before you can use this application first set it up on the printer For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 22 1 From the home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites gt select the form from the list gt enter the number of copies gt adjust other settings 2 Apply the changes Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or creat
261. m and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown Notices 369 DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam PERIGO Radia o a laser invis vel sera liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido Evite a exposi o aos feixes de laser Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima NEBEZPE Kdy jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokov na pojistka ze za zen je vys l no neviditeln laserov z en Nevystavujte se p soben laserov ho paprsku FARE Usynlig laserstr ling n r patroner fjernes og sp rreanordningen er sl et fra Undg at blive udsat for laserstr len GEVAAR Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser DANGER Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verrouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser VAARA N kym t nt lasersateilya on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt lasersateelle altistumista GEFAHR Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkass
262. mage Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Difficult Media Letter Difficult Media A5 Difficult Media Legal Difficult Media A4 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Use Multi Page TIFF On Off 208 To Specify the size of the original document Note Mixed Sizes is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the scan job Note On is the factory default setting Enable Analog Receive Off On E mail Settings menu Use E mail Server Setup Subject Message File Name Enable receiving of analog faxes Note Off is the factory default setting VO Specify e mail server information E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On Send a copy of the e mail to the sender Note Never appears is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 209 Use To E mail Server Setup Specify the maximum e mail size Max E mail size Note E mails bigg
263. mation see a Adding available options in the print driver on page 51 b Resend the print job Does the internal option operate correctly Internal print server does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Reinstall the internal print server a Remove and then install the internal print server For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 34 b Print a menu settings page and then check if the internal print server is listed in the Installed Features list Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 Contact customer support Check if the internal print server is supported by the printer Note An internal print server from another printer may not work with this printer Troubleshooting Action Step 2 Check the cable and the internal print server connection Use the correct cable and then check if it is securely connected to the internal print server Does the internal print server operate correctly Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Make sure the Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed i a Install the ISP For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 34 b Print a menu settings page and then check if the ISP is listed in the Installed Features list Is the ISP listed
264. med originals if restarting job 310 Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job 310 Replace maintenance kit 0 estimated pages remain 80 xy 311 Replace missing fuser 80 xx 311 Replace roller kit 81 xx 311 Replace separator pad 311 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 311 Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy 311 Replace wiper 311 replacing a staple cartridge 262 replacing supplies staple cartridge 262 replacing the toner cartridge 255 258 reports viewing 265 Reports menu 165 reserve print jobs 96 printing from a Macintosh computer 97 printing from Windows 97 resolution e mail options 116 fax options 141 scan options 149 resolution fax changing 138 Restore held jobs 312 restoring factory default settings 267 RJ 11 adapter 129 S safety information 7 8 Index Save As Shortcut copy options 111 e mail options 117 scan options 148 saving paper 107 Scan document too long 312 scan image output file type 149 scan options darkness 149 file name 148 original size 148 page setup 150 resolution 149 Save As Shortcut 148 Scan Preview 150 Send As 149 Scan Preview scan options 150 scan preview fax options 142 scan screen content source 149 content type 149 Scan to Computer setting up 147 Scan to Network setting up 24 using 144 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 358 partial document or photo scans 358 scan job was not successful 359 scanner unit does not
265. mponent s Lexmark Regulatory Type Model LEX M01 005 FCC ID IYLLEXM01005 IC 2376A M01005 Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Industry Canada Canada Under Industry Canada regulations this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum or lesser gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power EIRP is not more than that necessary for successful communication This device complies with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standards Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Notices 376 Industrie Canada Canada Selon la r glementation d Industrie Canada l metteur radio ne fonctionner qu avec une ant
266. n place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the next page 3 Touch Finish the Job Copying photos 1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt Photo gt ZS 3 From the Content Source menu select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo 4 Touch S gt Copy It Note If you have more photos to copy then place the next photo on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the next page 5 Touch Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Copying on transparencies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt ZS Copying 102 3 Navigate to Copy to gt select the tray that contains transparencies gt Copy It If there are no trays that contain transparencies then navigate to Manual Feeder gt A gt select the size of the transparencies gt A gt Transparency gt JS 4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder and then touch Copy It Copying on letterhead 1 L
267. nation of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cing Le num ro REN du mo
268. nch finisher is installed Hole Punch Mode Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose of 2 holes collecting the sheets in a binder or folder 3 holes Notes 4 holes r e 3 holes is the U S factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Offset Pages Offset pages at certain instances None Notes Between Copies Between Jobs e None is the factory default setting Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then each set of printed pages are offset such as all page 1 s and all page 2 s Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Quality menu Use a Print Resolution Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch 300 dpi Note 600 dpi is the factory default setting 600 dpi 1200 dpi 1200 Image Q 2400 Image Q Pixel Boost Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity in order to enhance images horizontally Off or vertically or to enhance fonts Fonts Note Off is the factory default setting Horizontally Vertically Both directions Understanding the printer menus Use Tone
269. ncies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt 4 gt type the name of the recipient gt Search Note You can search only for one name at a time 4 Touch the name of the recipient and then touch Fax It Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options gt Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server then the Delayed Send button does not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the fax queue 4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted and then touch ZS 5 Touch Fax It Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Assign a shortc
270. nd the print job Did the job print Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Go to step 4 Step 4 a Disable the Page Protect feature From the printer control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 5 a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer b Resend the print job Did the job print The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 5 Go to step 6 Step 6 Install additional printer memory and then resend the print job Did the job print The problem is solved Contact customer support Troubleshooting Tray linking does not work Notes e The trays can detect paper length 329 e The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Action Step 1 a Open the trays and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray e Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray b Resend the print job Do the trays link correct
271. nded electrical outlet printer and the other to a properly grounded Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electiicalourles electrical outlet Step 4 Unplug the other Go to step 5 Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet electrical equipment and then turn on the printer If the printer does not work then reconnect the other electrical equipment Does other electrical equipment work Step 5 Go to step 6 Make sure to match the Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted following in the correct ports e The USB symbol on the cable with the Are the cables inserted in the correct ports USB symbol on the printer e The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port Step 6 Turn on the switch or Go to step 7 Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker reset the breaker Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker Step 7 Connect the printer Go to step 8 Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible Power cord directly to power supplies or extension cords a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords ee ee eee oes Troubleshooting Action Step 8 Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printe
272. ng 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness Lighten or darken the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specify the size of the original document Letter Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory Legal default setting Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 AS A6 JIS BS Difficult Media Letter Difficult Media A5 Difficult Media Legal Difficult Media A4 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x 5in 4x 6in Sides Duplex Off Long Edge Short Edge Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two sided scanning Note Off is the factory default setting p Understanding the printer menus Use JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Text Default 5 90 Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image 216 To Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90
273. ng copies 106 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 298 compressed images appear on prints 331 confidential data information on securing 246 confidential jobs modifying print settings 98 confidential print jobs 96 printing from a Macintosh computer 97 printing from Windows 97 Confidential Print menu 181 Index Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 298 configuration information wireless network 53 Configure MP menu 152 configuring supply notifications imaging unit 266 supply notifications maintenance kit 266 supply notifications toner cartridge 266 configuring e mail settings 112 configuring port settings 55 configuring supply notifications 266 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 134 connecting to a wireless network using PIN Personal Identification Number method 54 using Push Button Configuration method 54 using the Embedded Web Server 55 using wireless setup wizard 54 conservation settings brightness adjusting 240 conserving supplies 238 Eco Mode 239 Hibernate mode 240 Quiet Mode 239 Sleep Mode 240 conserving supplies 238 contacting customer support 363 content e mail settings 116 content source e mail settings 116 fax options 142 content type e mail settings 116 fax options 142 control panel printer 15 indicator light 15 Sleep button light 15 controller board accessing 27 copies copy options 110 copy job canceling using the ADF 109 using the scanner glas
274. ns 27 internal print server troubleshooting 318 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 55 installing 34 troubleshooting 319 IP address of computer finding 20 IP address printer finding 20 IPv6 menu 170 J jams avoiding 268 locating jam areas 271 locations 271 numbers 271 jams clearing behind rear door 279 duplex 284 in automatic document feeder top cover 290 in mailbox rear door 287 in manual feeder 286 in staple finisher 292 in stapler door 291 in tray x 285 inside the printer 273 rear door 277 standard bin jam 283 Job Accounting menu 229 L labels paper tips 84 letterhead copying on 102 loading 2100 sheet tray 68 loading multipurpose feeder 75 84 loading trays 58 84 light indicator 15 line filter 125 LINE port 49 linking trays 81 82 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 303 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 303 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 303 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 304 Load Manual Feeder with custom string paper orientation 304 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name paper orientation 304 Load Manual Feeder with paper size paper orientation 304 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 304 Load staples 305 loading 2100 sheet tray 68 card stock 75 envelopes 75 letterhead in 2100 sheet tray 68 letterhead in multip
275. nt menu Use Max Invalid PIN Off 2 10 Confidential Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Repeat Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Note Off is the factory default setting XX aK Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Notes e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs Notes e If the Confidential Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value e If the printer is turned off then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are deleted Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs Understanding the printer menus 182 Use aie Verify Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Reserve Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Note Off is the factory default setting Erase Temporary Data Files menu Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that
276. nt server option or other network device Step 3 Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Go to step 4 361 Turn on the printer Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet Are the other electrical equipment working electrical equipment and turn on the printer If the printer does not work then reconnect the other electrical equipment and then go to step 6 Step 4 Turn on the switch or Goto step 5 Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker reset the breaker Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker Step 5 Connect the printer Go to step 6 Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible Power cord directly to power supplies or extension cords a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords Step 6 Unplug the other Go to step 7 Step 7 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Are the printer
277. nter is answering calls Single Ring Only Note All Rings is the factory default setting Double Ring Only Triple Ring Only Single or Double Rings Only Single or Triple Rings Only Double or Triple Rings Only Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission To Format Enter specific fax information Reply Address Subject Message Specify SMTP setup information SMTP Setup Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server port information Secondary SMTP Gateway Image Format PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Specify the image format Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo aie Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting 207 Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Fax Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specify how the content was originally produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Specify quality in dots per inch dpi Note Standard is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Orientation Portrait Landscape Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the orientation of the scanned i
278. ntrol panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the flash memory Troubleshooting 307 e Install a flash memory card with larger capacity Note Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted Paper changes needed Try one or more of the following e Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing e Cancel the current print job Parallel port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Enable the parallel port From the printer control panel navigate to Network Ports gt Parallel x gt Parallel Buffer gt Auto Note The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing For more information visit http support lexmark com or contact customer support Reattach bin x Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Reattach the indicated bin 1 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Remove the indicated bin Reattach the bin uu FB WwW N Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on e Remove the indicated bin 1 Turn off
279. o Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Dial Mode Tone Pulse Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Custom Job scanning On Off Scan Preview On Off Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone Note No is the factory default setting Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Note Yes is the factory default setting Fax files that are scanned at the printer Note On is the factory default setting Allow the print driver to send fax jobs Note Yes is the factory default setting Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Specify the dialing sound Note Tone is the factory default setting Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent Note 33600 is the factory default setting Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Background Removal 4to4 Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Bl
280. o be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc Arial The Monotype Corporation plc CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc New York Apple Computer Inc Oxford Arthur Baker Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc K Notices 366 Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries All other trademar
281. o clear the message and continue printing x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 284 2 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 1 Pull out the tray completely Note Lift the tray slightly and then pull it out 2 Push down the front duplex flap then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull the paper to the right and out of the printer Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 285 3 Insert the tray 4 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam open tray x 24x 1 Check which tray is indicated on the printer display and then pull the tray 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 286 3 Insert the tray 4 From the printer control panel touch Done to clear the message and continue printing x page jam clear manual feeder 250 1 From the multipurpose feeder firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 287 2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then
282. o make sure that you are using the correct splitter plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone Faxing 128 Scenario 4 Digital telephone service through a cable provider Setup 1 Printer is connected directly to a cable modem 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem Note The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port 3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer Notes e To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active plug an analog telephone into the telephone port and then listen for a dial tone If you hear a dial tone then the port is active Faxing 129 e If you need two telephone ports for your devices but do not want to pay additional cost then do not plug the printer into the second telephone port You can use a phone splitter Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter e Make sure you use a phone splitter not a line splitter To make sure that you are using the correct splitter plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then l
283. oad an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt ZS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt select the tray containing the letterhead gt Copy It 5 lf there are no trays that support letterhead then navigate to Manual Feeder gt select the size of the letterhead gt Letterhead 6 Load the letterhead faceup top edge first into the multipurpose feeder and then touch Copy It Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen touch Copy 2 Adjust the copy settings and then touch Save as Shortcut Note If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created then the settings are not saved 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct and then touch OK If the shortcut name is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information Notes e The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen e You can u
284. oad paper as shown in the illustration e If you are loading envelopes then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left side of the tray Loading paper and specialty media e Make sure the paper is below the solid line which is the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 66 Loading paper and specialty media 67 e When using card stock labels or other types of specialty media make sure the paper is below the dashed line which is the alternate paper fill indicator 6 For custom or Universal size paper adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack and then lock the length guide Loading paper and specialty media 68 7 Insert the tray 8 From the printer control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the 2100 sheet tray A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray 2 Adjust the width and length guides Loading paper and specialty media Loading A5 size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5 b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place 69
285. oaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Light Weight Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light Light Heavy Weight Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy Heavy Rough Cotton Weight Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Custom x Weight Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded Light Notes Normal Heavy e Normal is the factory default setting The options appear only when the custom type is supported Understanding the printer menus 160 Paper Loading menu Use To Card Stock Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock Duplex as the paper type Off Recycled Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled Duplex as the paper type Off Labels Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as Duplex the paper type Off Vinyl Labels Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl Duplex Labels as the paper type Off Bond Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as Duplex the paper type Off Letterhead Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead Duplex as the paper type Off Preprinted Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with P
286. of alphabetical and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 00 PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes 12 is the factory default setting Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 0 014 of an inch This can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi This can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For non scalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page Notes e Portrait is the factory default setting It prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page Specify the number of lines that print on each page Notes e 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting The printer sets the amo
287. oftware handshaking settings for the serial port DTR Notes DTR DSR XON XOFF DTR is the factory default setting XON XOFF DTR DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting XONXOFF DTRDSR e XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting e XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Robust XON Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Baud Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 1200 Notes 2400 4800 e 9600 is the factory default setting 9600 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 19200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 Data Bits Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame 7 8 Note 8 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 178 Use To Parity Set the parity for serial input and output data frames Even Note None is the factory default setting Odd None Ignore Honor DSR Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses
288. oids appear on prints Solving copy problems e Copier does not respond on page 349 e Partial document or photo copies on page 349 e Poor copy quality on page 350 e Scanner unit does not close on page 351 Troubleshooting Copier does not respond Action Step 1 Check if an error or status message appears on the display Does an error or status message appear Step 2 Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 3 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn it back on Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear Yes Clear the error or status message Go to step 3 The problem is solved 349 Go to step 2 Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Contact customer support Partial document or photo copies Action Step 1 Check the placement of the document or photo Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Yes Go to step 2 Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Step 2 Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray From the P
289. ol FTP server For more information see Scanning to an FTP address on page 145 t Scan to Network Scan a document and then send it to a network shared folder For more information see Setting up Scan to Network on page 24 Ka JS Setting up and using the home screen applications 22 Activating the home screen applications Finding information about the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications Before you can use these applications you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 20 For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications do the following 1 Go to http support lexmark com 2 Click Software Solutions and then select either of the following e Scan to Network This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application e Other Applications This lets you find information about the other applications 3 Click the Manuals tab and then select the document for the home screen application Setting up Forms and Favorites Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Use To Streamline work proc
290. om the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Custom Text x Model Name Notes IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Displayed Information continued Black Toner Customize the displayed information for Black Toner Select from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Note Do not display is the factory default setting for When to display Displayed Information continued Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors Customize the displayed information for certain menus Select from the following options Display Yes No Message to display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Note No is the factory default setting for Display Understanding the printer menus Use Home screen customization Change Language Copy Copy Shortcuts Fax Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Apps Bookmarks Jobs by User Forms and Favorites Card Copy Scan to Network MyShortcut Multi Send 189 To Change the icons that appear on the home screen For each icon select from the following options Display Do Not display Date Format MM DD YYYY
291. on Setting up and using the home screen applications 23 Setting up Card Copy Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Use To Quickly and easily copy insurance identification and other wallet size cards You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page saving paper and showing the information on the card in a more convenient manner 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Card Copy 3 Change the default scanning options if necessary e Default tray Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images e Default number of copies Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application is used e Default contrast setting Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the scanned card is printed Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically Default scale setting Set the size of the scanned card when printed The default setting is 100 full size Resolution setting Adjust the quality
292. oncentrations exceeding 0 1 by weight and 0 01 by weight for cadmium except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules Product disposal Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer Notices 368 ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Temperature information Ambient operating temperature 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Shipping temperature 40 to 43 3 C 40 to 110 F Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35 C 34 to 95 F 8 to 80 RH Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787 800 nanometers The laser syste
293. one Note None is the factory default setting Solid Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple page images Horizontal Notes Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical e Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Off Notes Between Copies BetweenJobs e Off is the factory default setting Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Multipurpose Feeder Understanding the printer menus Blank Pages Do Not Print Print OCR Settings menu 224 Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Auto Rotate Automatically rotate scanned documents for proper orientation Polish On Note On is th
294. one of the trays then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper ina tray or multipurpose feeder Scale This option lets you scale the document from 25 to 400 of the original document size You can also set automatic scaling When copying to a different paper size such as from legal size to letter size paper set the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying e To decrease or increase the value by 1 touch or onthe printer control panel To make a continuous decrease or increase in value hold the button for two seconds or more Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document Sides Duplex This option lets you make one or two sided copies from one or two sided original documents Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document Copies This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed Content This option lets you set the original document type and source Select from the following content types e Graphics The original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Text Photo The
295. ont that you want to use on your computer For more information contact your system support person b Resend the print job Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges XR Yes Go to step 2 Contact customer support 330 No The problem is solved The problem is solved Clipped pages or images Leading edge Trailing edge Troubleshooting 331 Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper following menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Specify the paper size from the tray Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Step 4 Contact customer The problem is solved a Reinstall the imaging unit support 1 Remove the toner cartridge 2 Remove the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do n
296. ontact customer Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints Toner rubs off Leading edge ABC rad K Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Specify the paper type From the Paper menu on the printer control panel check the paper type texture and weight texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper Do the paper type texture and weight match the paper loaded in the leaded th Ume May tray Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Resend the print job support Does the toner still rub off a J Toner specks appear on prints Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact customer The problem is solved support Do toner specks appear on prints Troubleshooting 347 Transparency print quality is poor Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Set the paper type to From the printer control panel set the paper type in the Paper menu to Transparency match the paper loaded in the tray Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency support b Resend the print job Is the print quality still poor Uneven print density BS ABCD ABCD Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact custome
297. ored jobs print Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Print Area Set the logical and physical printable area Normal Notes Fit to Page Whole Page e Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary e Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting Whole Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Set the storage location for downloads Notes RAM is the factory default setting Storing downloads in the RAM is temporary e Storing downloads in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in the flash memory or in the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off e This menu appears only when a formatted working flash drive or printer hard disk is installed Understanding the printer menus 226 Resource Save Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads such as On fonts and macros stored in the RAM when the printer receives a Off job that requires more memory than is available Notes e Off is the factory default setting Thi
298. ormal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Transparency Weight Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Recycled Weight Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Labels Weight Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Vinyl Labels Weight Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Bond Weight Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Understanding the printer menus 159 Use Envelope Weight Light Normal Heavy Rough Envelope Weight To Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Letterhead Weight Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Preprinted Weight Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Colored Weight Specify the relative weight of the colored paper l
299. ormation on card stock and labels see the Card Stock amp Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Using specialty media Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly affect print quality From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the card stock loaded in the tray Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed problems Before loading the card stock on the tray flex and fan the card stock to loosen them Straighten the edges ona level surface Tips on using envelopes From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the envelopes loaded in the tray Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib paper or 25 cotton Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that
300. orms and Favorites 93 using Hibernate mode 240 using recycled paper 238 using shortcuts sending fax 136 using the address book 115 sending fax 137 using the touch screen buttons 18 Utilities menu 230 XPS menu 231 V verify print jobs 96 printing from a Macintosh computer 97 printing from Windows 97 vertical voids appear 347 viewing reports 265 viewing a fax log 139 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 265 voice mail setting up 121 Voice over Internet Protocol VolP fax setup 126 voids appear 347 VolP adapter 126 volatile memory 243 erasing 243 volatility statement of 243 W Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator 315 wiping the printer hard disk 244 Wireless menu 170 wireless network configuration information 53 wireless network setup using the Embedded Web Server 55
301. orrectly on the computer or printer control panel Store paper per manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam messages and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display Open the doors covers and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam Clearing jams Notes 272 e When Jam Assist is set to On the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page has been cleared Check your printed output for blank pages e When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto the printer reprints jammed pages However the Auto setting reprints jammed pages if adequate printer memory is available 11 1 Stapler doors x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 2 Duplex area x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 3 Trays x page jam open tray x 24x Area name Printer control panel message What to do Remove paper from the stapler bin and then open the stapler outer and inner doors Then remove the staple cartridge and then remove the jammed staples Pull out tray 1 completely then push the front duplex flap down and then remove the jammed paper Remove all paper from the standard bin and then remove the jammed paper 4 Staple finisher rear x page jam remove paper open door finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451
302. ort of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ 11 adapter and then connect the adapter to the wall jack 3 If you want to connect another device telephone or answering machine to the same wall jack and if the device has a non RJ 11 connector then connect it directly to the telephone adapter Notes e The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter Do not remove the plug from the port of the printer In some countries or regions the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug Faxing 132 Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany The German wall jack has two kinds of ports The N ports are for fax machines modems and answering machines The F port is for telephones NFN Faxing 133 Connect the printer to any of the N ports 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ 11 adapter and then connect the adapter to an N port 3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack then connect the devices as shown Note Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system Faxing 134 Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company This servi
303. ort of the printer Connect the other end to the phone port on the DSL filter 3 To continue using a computer for Internet access connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter 4 To connect a telephone to the printer remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer and then connect the telephone to the port Scenario 3 VoIP telephone service Faxing 127 To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter Note The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port 3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer Tips for this setup To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active plug an analog telephone into the phone port and then listen for a dial tone If you hear a dial tone then the port is active e If you need two phone ports for your devices but do not want to pay additional cost then do not plug the printer into the second phone port You can use a phone splitter Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter Note Make sure you use a phone splitter not a line splitter T
304. ortcuts 136 391 using the address book 137 sending fax at a scheduled time 137 sending fax using the address book 137 Serial x menu 175 Serial option x error 54 313 Serial port x disabled 56 313 serial printing setting up 56 Set Date Time menu 184 setting paper size 58 paper type 58 TCP IP address 168 setting the fax number 134 setting the outgoing fax name 134 setting the Universal paper size 58 setting up e mail alerts 265 setting up fax country or region specific 129 digital telephone service 128 DSL connection 125 standard telephone line connection 121 VoIP connection 126 setting up fax and e mail functions 356 setting up serial printing 56 Settings menu 225 shipping the printer 264 shortcuts creating copy screen 102 e mail 113 fax destination 137 138 FTP address 145 FTP destination 144 showing icons on the home screen 21 sides duplex copy options 110 Sleep Mode adjusting 240 SMTP Setup menu 178 Some held jobs were not restored 313 standard 550 sheet tray loading 58 Standard Network menu 166 Standard network software error 54 313 Index standard tray loading 58 Standard USB menu 172 Standard USB port disabled 56 313 staple cartridge replacing 262 staple cartridges ordering 254 staple jams clearing in staple finisher 292 statement of volatility 243 status of parts checking 251 status of supplies checking 251 storing paper 88 supplies 254 storing print jobs 9
305. ory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time Note The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Printing 97 Use ae Notes e Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel e All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs 2 Touch Submit Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 5 Click OK or Print 6 From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt
306. ot expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Compressed images appear on prints Note Printing on letter size paper using a 220 volt fuser compresses images Troubleshooting Action Step 1 type Note Use a 110 volt fuser for printing on letter size paper and a 220 volt fuser for printing on A4 size paper b Resend the print job Do compressed images still appear a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser Yes The problem is solved 332 Go to step 2 Step 2 a Replace the fuser For more information on installing the fuser see the instruction sheet that came with the part b Resend the print job Do compressed images still appear X The problem is solved Contact customer support Gray background on prints Leading edge Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel decrease the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge a Remove the toner cartridge
307. other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack Tips for this setup e If you have only one telephone number on your line then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine For example if the answering machine picks up calls after four rings then set the printer to pick up after six rings This way the answering machine picks up calls first and your voice calls are received If the call is a fax then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and takes over the call Faxing 124 e If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer Otherwise the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically Setup 3 Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack 3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer Faxing 125 Tips for this setup e This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service If you have distinctive ring service then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer Otherwise the printer does not rec
308. ough the specified serial port e Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled From the printer control panel set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial x menu Some held jobs were not restored From the printer control panel touch Continue to delete the indicated job Note Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible Standard network software error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to continue printing Turn off the printer and then turn it back on e Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message Standard USB port disabled 56 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Enable the USB port From the printer control panel navigate to Network Ports gt USB Buffer gt Auto Note The printer discards any data received through the USB port Supply needed to complete job Do either of the following e Install the missing supply to complete the job e Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 314 Too many bins attached 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra bins 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn th
309. oval 4to4 Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Auto Center Off On Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 197 To Automatically center the content on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specify the contrast used for the copy job Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy 4 to 4 ADF Multi feed Sensor On off Scan edge to edge Note 0 is the factory default setting Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once Note On is the factory default setting Allow edge to edge scanning of the original document off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness
310. ow x estimated pages remain 88 xy 296 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 296 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 296 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 296 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 297 Check tray x connection 297 Close door or insert cartridge 297 Close finisher rear door 297 Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job 2yy xx 297 Close rear door 298 Close top access cover 298 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 298 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 298 Defective flash detected 51 298 Disk full 62 298 Disk full scan job canceled 299 Disk must be formatted for use in this device 299 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 299 Index Empty the hole punch box 299 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 299 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 299 Fax memory full 299 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 299 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 300 Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator 300 Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator 300 Imaging unit low 84 xy 300 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy 300 Imaging unit very low x estimated pages remain 84 xy 300 Incompatible output bin x 59 300 Incompatible tray x 59 301
311. p 2 336 The problem is solved Step 2 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Step 3 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Printer is printing solid black pages Go to step 3 Contact customer support The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 1 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer printing solid black pages Yes Go to step 2 337 The problem is solved Step 2 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the printer printing solid black pages Contact customer support The problem is solved Print irregularities Leading edge ORIAN
312. page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e JPEG Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document e XPS Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages e RTF Use to create a file in editable format TXT Use to create ASCII text file with no formatting Content This option lets you set the original document type and source Select from the following content types Graphics The original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Photo The original document is mostly a photo or an image Text The content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Text Photo The original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Select from the following content sources Black White Laser The original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Color Laser The original document was printed using a color laser printer Inkjet The original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Magazine The original document is from a magazine Newspaper The original document is from a newspaper e Other The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer e Photo Film The original document is a photo from film Press The original document was printed using a printing press Scanning 150 Page Setup This option lets you change the following sett
313. pecify the DHCP address and parameter assignment On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable RARP Specify the RARP address assignment setting On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Enable BOOTP Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable AutolP Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enable the built in FTP server which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer Yes Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enable the built in Web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address Enable DDNS Yes No Enable mDNS Yes No DNS Server Address View or change the current DDNS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting View or change the current mDNS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting View or change the current DNS server address Backup DNS Server Address Backup DNS Server Address 2 View or change the backup DNS server addresses Backup DNS Server Address 3 Enable HTTPS Yes No View or change the current HTTPS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 17
314. pects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and e The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt Notices 374 The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another Japanese telecom notice The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified by JATE with Certification Number A11 0160001 Lexmar
315. per from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do paper jams still occur frequently Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved a Review the tips on avoiding jams For more information see Avoiding SUpport jams on page 268 b Follow the recommendations and then resend the print job Do paper jams still occur frequently ee S S S Troubleshooting Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared Action Check the entire paper path for jammed paper a Remove any jammed paper Does the paper jam message remain Solving print problems Printing problems Confidential and other held jobs do not print b From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Yes Contact customer support 322 No The problem is solved Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Action Step 1 Open the held jobs folder on the printer display and then verify that your print job is listed Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder Yes Go to step 2 a Select one of the Print and Hold options and then resend the print job For more information see Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 97 Step 2 The print job
316. pleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address Note The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone list of zones available on the network Note The default zone for the network is the factory default setting Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network Understanding the printer menus Standard USB menu 172 Use To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidire
317. printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding the printer menus Use PS SmartSwitch On Off NPA Mode On Off Auto 174 To Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Parallel Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Off On Auto Set the size of the parallel input buffer Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes e The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments e
318. r and the other to the computer print server option or other network device Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Step 9 Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed Yes Go to step 9 Go to step 10 317 No Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Turn off the printer remove all packing materials then reinstall the hardware options and then turn on the printer Step 10 Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver Are the port settings correct Step 11 Check the installed printer driver Is the correct printer driver installed Go to step 11 Go to step 12 Use correct printer driver settings Install the correct printer driver Step 12 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Is the printer working The problem is solved Contact customer support Printer display is blank Action Step 1 Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel Does Ready appear on the printer display Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Step 2 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds
319. r and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status gt More Details Maintaining the printer 252 Ordering supplies To order parts and supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions go to www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Note All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts Use of third party supplies or parts may affect the performance reliability or life of the printer and its imaging components Use of third party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage Damage caused by the use of third party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results if third party supplies or parts are used Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components Estimated number of rema
320. r photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides Note To avoid a cropped image make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are the same 3 From the printer control panel press el Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 Adjust the paper guides Copying 101 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt specify the copy settings gt Copy It Copying using the scanner glass 1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt specify the copy settings gt Copy It If you have more pages to scan the
321. r Darkness 1 10 Enhance Fine Lines On Off 229 To Lighten or darken the printed output Notes 8is the factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes e Off is the factory default setting To set this option using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field Gray Correction Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images Job Accounting menu Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Off Brightness Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it You can conserve toner 6 to6 by lightening the output Note 0 is the factory default setting Contrast Adjust the contrast of printed objects 0 5 Note 0 is the factory default setting Note This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Use Job Accounting Log Off On Job Accounting Utilities a Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives Note Off is the factory default setting Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Accounting Log Frequency Daily Weekly Monthly Log Action at End of Frequency None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp De
322. r The problem is solved support Is the print density uneven Vertical voids appear on prints Leading edge A Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Troubleshooting 348 Action Yes No Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved Check if you are using a recommended type of paper a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Support Do vertical v
323. r message Note This option is supported only in some printer models E mailing 112 E mailing Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Setting up the printer to e mail Setting up the e mail function 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt E mail FTP Settings gt E mail Settings 3 Enter the appropriate information and then click Submit Configuring e mail settings 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt E mail FTP Settings gt E mail Settings 3 Enter the appropriate information and then click Submit E mailing 113 Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using
324. r organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data e Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable e Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply turn off the printer Securing the printer 244 Erasing non volatile memory Erase individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions by following these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display inste
325. r shortcut on the list Note The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified 8 View the file from the computer Note The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified Setting up Scan to Computer Notes e This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later e Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network Scanning 148 1 Open the printers folder and then select your printer Note If your printer is not in the list then add your printer 2 Open the printer properties and then adjust the settings as necessary 3 From the control panel touch Scan to Computer gt select the appropriate scan setting gt Send It Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer Note The USB Drive home screen appears 4 Select the destination folder and then touch Scan to USB drive Note The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity 5 Adjust the scan
326. rated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode gt select a setting Saving money and the environment 240 Use aie On Reduce printer noise Notes e Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed e Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There will be a short delay before the first page is printed Off Use factory default settings Note This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer 3 Click Submit Adjusting Sleep mode 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Sleep Mode 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode 3 Apply the changes Using Hibernate mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode Notes Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode e Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode e Ifthe printer is in Hibernate mode then the Embedded Web Server is disabled 1 From the home screen navigate to i gt Settings gt General Settings 2 From the Press Sleep
327. rd output bin Remove the paper stack from the standard bin Replace all originals if restarting job Try one or more of the following e Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job e Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job e Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job e Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job e Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer x indicates the value of the printer region y indicates the value of the cartridge region x and y can have the following values Troubleshooting 310 Printer and toner cartridge regions Region number Region 0 Global United States Canada European Economic Area EEA Switzerland Asia Pacific Austra
328. red in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt Submit Clearing jams 268 Clearing jams Carefully select paper and specialty media and then load them properly to avoid most jams If jams occur then follow the steps outlined in this chapter Note Jam Recovery is set to Auto by default The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks Avoiding jams Load paper properly e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper e Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing e Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it before printing or wait for a prompt to load it e Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator Clearing jams 269 e Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration e Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right s
329. repaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Go to www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Securing the printer 243 Securing the printer Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Type of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs as well as form data and font data XR a Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances e The printer is being decommissioned e The printer hard disk is being replaced e The printer is being moved to a different department or location e The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization e The printer is being removed from your premises for service e The printer is being sold to anothe
330. reprinted Duplex as the paper type Off Colored Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Colored Duplex as the paper type Off Light Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Light as Duplex the paper type Off Heavy Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as Duplex the paper type Off Rough Cotton Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or Duplex Cotton as the paper type Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections e Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from Print Properties or the print dialog depending on your operating system Understanding the printer menus 161 Custom x Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Custom x Custom Types menu Duplex as the paper type Off Note Custom x Loading is available only when the custom type is supported Notes e Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections e Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from Print Properties or the print dialog depending on your operating system Custom Names menu Use To Custom Type x Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory defau
331. resentative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below Notices 377 AT EE EL IT LI PT RO esky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje e v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EMnvik ME THN MAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO MPO ON ZYMMOPO ONETAI NPOZ TI OYZIOAEIZ AMAITH EI KAI TI2 AOINE XETIKE AIATAZEI TH OAHMIA2 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tu
332. rgy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 Notices 371 Japanese VCCI notice HimlCCOPFNIVERRENTWSEE ROBE MELTNET CORBIS DIA A RRM ECT COREE RERR CRASS CBRE SHOT CEMHVES COMBIMSHAAMBISMR aT SKIBRENSCEMBVET VCCI A CORB TIZAMMRMNRE CT CORB RR CREAT DCB RBS ESSEC CEMHVET COMBI PY BIS WHR ET SEDBRENSCEPHWVET VCCI A European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tow
333. rint jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within that time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Click Submit to save the modified settings Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press J on the keypad 2 Touch the print job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press E on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Printing Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder and then select your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it 99 Copying 100 Copying Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards o
334. rints Step 4 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Do horizontal voids appear on prints X J Troubleshooting 334 Incorrect margins on prints Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded b Resend the print job Are the margins correct Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the From the printer control panel set the paper size in the Paper menu to following match the paper loaded in the tray e Specify the paper size from the tray Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from support Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Are the margins correct Mc Troubleshooting 335 Paper curl Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Adjust the width and Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for length guides the size of the paper loaded Are the width and length guides positioned correctly Step 2 Go to step 3 Specify the paper type From the printer control pan
335. rvice is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for AES CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm ECDSA implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the product or service Notices 381 The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Int
336. s Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 268 Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e Ifyou are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode gt select a setting Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle e Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex feature Turn off print log features Me 3 Click Submit Reducing printer noise Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers sepa
337. s Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch screen printer models When selected in non touch screen printer models Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes e When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed e To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn off or reset the printer Coverage Estimator Off On XPS menu Print Error Pages Off On PDF menu Scale to Fit Yes No Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job Note Off is the factory default setting Print a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Note Off is the factory default setting Scale page content to fit the selected paper size Note No is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 232 Annotations Print annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Print PS Error Print a page containing the PostScript error On Off Note Off is the factory de
338. s 109 copy options advanced options 111 collate 110 copies 110 darkness 110 Save As Shortcut 111 sides duplex 110 copy quality adjusting 105 copy screen content source 110 content type 110 options 109 110 Copy Settings menu 193 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 349 partial document or photo copies 349 poor copy quality 350 poor scanned image quality 358 scanner unit does not close 351 360 copying adding an overlay message 108 adjusting quality 105 canceling a copy job 109 collating copies 106 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 102 custom job 107 different paper sizes 103 enlarging 105 inserting a header or footer 108 multiple pages on one sheet 107 on both sides of the paper duplexing 104 on letterhead 102 on transparencies 101 photos 101 placing separator sheets between copies 106 quick copy 100 reducing 105 selecting a tray 103 to a different size 103 using the ADF 100 using the scanner glass 101 copying different paper sizes 103 copying multiple pages on one sheet 107 copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 104 383 copying on transparencies 101 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 137 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 144 Custom Bin Names menu 162 Custom Names menu 161 custom paper type assigning 82 custom paper type name creating 81 Custom Scan Sizes menu 162 Custom Type x changing name 81 Custom Types menu
339. s Display Remote Station Name Dialed Number Enable Job Log On Off Enable printing of a received error log Note Print Never is the factory default setting Enable automatic printing of fax logs Notes On is the factory default setting e Logs print after every 200 fax jobs Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax name returned Note Remote Station Name is the factory default setting Enable access to the Fax Job log Note On is the factory default setting Enable Call Log On Off Enable access to the Fax Call log Note On is the factory default setting Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specify the bin for the printed fax logs Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 206 Speaker Settings Specify the mode of the speaker Speaker Mode Always Off On until Connected Note On until Connected is the factory default setting A sound is issued until the fax connection is made Always On Speaker Volume Set the speaker volume to high or low High Low Note High is the factory default setting Ringer Volume Enable or disable the ringer volume Off On Note On is the factory default setting XR Answer On All Rings Specify ring patterns when the pri
340. s if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover gt 3 Remove the white underside of the scanner cover Maintaining the printer 249 4 Open the bottom ADF door 5 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door 6 Close the bottom ADF door 7 Place the white underside of the scanner cover on the scanner glass and then close the scanner cover Maintaining the printer 250 8 Wipe the areas shown and then let them dry e i oa sora sa ee White underside of the scanner cover Scanner glass ADF glass hl wl n e White underside of the ADF cover 9 Close the scanner cover Emptying the hole punch box 1 Pull out the hole punch box 2 Empty the container Maintaining the printer 251 3 Insert the emptied hole punch box back into the finisher until it clicks into place le Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Supplies gt View Supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network 1 Open a Web browse
341. s sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs e On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory then Memory Full 38 appears and downloads are not deleted Print All Order Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed Alphabetical when Print All is selected Oldest First Note Alphabetical is the factory default setting Print jobs always Newest First appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel Finishing menu Use To Sides Duplex Specify whether two sided duplex printing is set as the default for all print jobs 1 sided Notes 2 sided e 1 sided is the factory default setting You can set two sided printing from the printer software For Windows users Click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users Choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus Duplex Binding Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed Long Edge Notes Short Edge Long Edge is the factory default setting This assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Copies Specify the default number of copies for ea
342. s the factory default setting for Alarm Control This setting sounds several quick beeps e Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm e Continuous repeats several quick beeps in a regular interval Timeouts Standby Mode Disabled 1 240 Timeouts Sleep Mode Disabled 1 120 Timeouts Print with Display Off Allow printing with display off Display on when printing Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer enters a lower power state Note 15 is the factory default setting Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state Notes 20 is the factory default setting Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the room Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Print a job with the display turned off Note Display on when printing is the factory default setting Timeouts Hibernate Timeout Disabled 20 minutes 1 3 hours 6 hours 1 3 days 1 2 weeks 1 month Hibernate Timeout on Connection Hibernate Do Not Hibernate Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode Note 3 days is th
343. se a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Licensing notices All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the documentation CD Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product 1 meter average sound pressure dBA 55 XM7155 XM7163 56 XM 7170 Printing Scanning 57 Copying 55 XM7155 56 XM7163 XM7170 Ready 30 XM7155 XM7170 31 XM7163 Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Notices 367 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number India E Waste notice This product complies with the India E Waste Management and Handling Rules 2011 which prohibit use of lead mercury hexavalent chromium polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in c
344. se feeder Standard 550 sheet tray 2100 sheet tray Caster base Printer control panel 12 Learning about the printer Configured model 13 CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Hardware option Alternative hardware option Staple finisher e 4 bin mailbox e Offset stacker Staple hole punch finisher 550 sheet trays Caster base 2100 sheet tray None 2100 sheet tray 4 bin mailbox 550 sheet trays e Staple finisher Staple hole punch finisher e Offset stacker When using optional trays e Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100 sheet tray Understanding the basic functions of the scanner e Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs The 2100 sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration You cannot use an optional 550 sheet tray if the 2100 sheet tray is installed A maximum of three optional trays may be configured with the printer The printer supports only one finisher at a time e Send a fax using the printer control panel Learning about the printer 14 e
345. se settings in the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns e Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Does the caller ID appear Yes The problem is solved 352 Contact customer support X Cannot send or receive a fax Action Step 1 Check if an error or status message appears on the display Is there an error or status message on the display Yes Clear the error or status message No Go to step 2 Check the printer connections If applicable check if the cable connections for the following equipment are secure Telephone e Handset e Answering machine Are the cable connections secure Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the power Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and grounded electrical outlet a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 3 Go to step 4 Turn on the printer Check the power and then wait until Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on and if Ready appears P appears on the on the display 13p ay Is the printer turned on and does Ready appear on the display Step 4 Go to step 5 Securely connect the cables S e E Troubleshooting Action Step 5 a Check the telephone wall jack 1
346. se the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings Copying 103 Customizing copy settings Copying to a different size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt oS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt select a new size for the copy gt Si gt Copy It Making copies using paper from a selected tray 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt oS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt select the tray containing the paper type you want to
347. select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN Click OK or Print From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Printing 98 Modifying confidential print settings 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Confidential Print Setup 3 Modify the settings e Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts When a user exceeds that number all of the jobs for that user are deleted e Set an expiration time for confidential p
348. send the print job Is the tray working Yes The problem is solved 320 No Go to step 3 Step 3 Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer Print a menu settings page and then check if the tray is listed in the Installed Features list Step 4 Check if the tray is available in the printer driver Note If necessary manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 51 Is the tray available in the printer driver Go to step 4 Is the tray listed in the menu settings page The problem is solved Reinstall the tray For more information see the setup documentation that came with the tray Contact customer support USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed a Install the USB or parallel interface card For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 34 b Printa menu settings page and then check if the USB or parallel interface card is listed in the Installed Features list Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list Yes Go to step 2 No Check if you have a supported USB or parallel interface card Note A USB or parallel interface card from another printer may not work on this
349. sesscsessecsssseesecssesecsssseesesss 20D Finding advanced networking and administrator informMation ccccccccccececessseseeesesesesessnseaueeeaeaeess 265 Checking the virtuialidis plays ize ciscs isteeeeseredederd sehen suas i a ara AOR anand BA AE AAAA ENEA 265 Setting Upse miail alem na aGechucetea sha sescuteveassdancdessaisacescvvsnise cade cencadnssbecds E naa Sascesteeri easines 265 VIEWING ROPOMtS i coen naa ioan aa a OOA NEA TAAA AE R lanthubucdencaasceebeseess ledaasaecd catbesdecncsccaabeees 265 Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Servel cssssssssseceecessssssssnsnsaeeeeeeeeees 266 Restoring factory default SettingS csccsccccecccccssssesssseececeeececeeseessnsseeseeseseessseseseasensaseeeeeeeseseeeeeeess 267 Cl aring jaMS sissesrecssssesisnssoesssseesersissuspissapst can veoesustucasoureone rates ces siorse OS Avoiding ja MS saci e r e re a 200 aa aa aa a a a era Aa raa a N aaa ea a D a a aaae eaaa Dla Taa aae 268 Understanding jam messages and lOCations cscsssssssscecceecesceeeesesnsnseceeceeceesessesesesauseseeeeeeeeseseeenees 271 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 2OO 201 ccceeeceesssesssneaeeeececeeecesseseseeesssennaes 273 x page jam open upper rear door 202 cceccesesssssssnsneeceeeececeececescesesuseusaeseeceseeeeceseeeesesssessenaes 277 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 cccccscccccccececessesessssn
350. sheet of paper at a time and then shows an error message Note This option is supported only in select printer models Understanding the printer menus Understanding the printer menus Menus list Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu OCR Settings menu Print Settings Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Stapler Test Network Setup Page Network x Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Print Demo Asset Report Help Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide Network Ports Active NIC Standard Network Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup Manage Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts 151 Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Erase Temporary Data Files Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Option Card Menu2 A list of installed DLEs Download Emulators appears 1 Depending on the printer setup
351. sher a Plain pa 3 paper 90 176 g m x X X 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond Y y Card stock 163 g m v2 J 90 Ib index 199 g m X X 110 Ib index Transparency 146 g m Ji V 39 Ib bond Recycled 90 176 g m X X 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 3 16 24 Ib bond v Paper labels 180 g m X X 48 Ib bond Dual web and 180 g m X X Integrated 48 Ib bond Bond 90 176 g m X X 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v M 4 1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 2 Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on using transparencies on page 85 3 Set the paper type to Paper or Rough Cotton lt Paper and specialty media guide 92 1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 3 Set the paper type to Paper or Rough Cotton Paper type Paper weight 4 bin mailbox Offset stacker Staple finisher Staple hole punch finisher Envelope 105 g m x X 28 Ib bond Rough Envelope 105 g m x X 28 Ib bond Letterhead 90 176 g m x x 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m J d 16 24 Ib bond Preprinted 90 176 g m x x x x 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v v v Colored paper 90 176 g m 7 x x x 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v v Light paper 90 176 g
352. signated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit http support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com 2014 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software Program and any related documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7207 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U S Government end users a only as Commercial Items and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Notices 365 Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International Inc Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended t
353. size and type of paper To use the tray with the correct paper size or type touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel Note If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type then it prints from the default paper source e Cancel the current job Load paper source with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel Note If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper then it feeds from that tray or feeder If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper then it prints from the default paper source e Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 304 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper Touse the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel Note If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray or feeder If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with
354. sneaeaeeeeeceeeseeesesessnenes 279 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 c cccccccccccsssssssseeceeceeessessssausaeececescessssnssaeeesesseesesenes 283 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 cccccccccccecessssssssssneceeceeceecesssssnsnsaeeceeeeseeeeees 284 x page jam open tray X 24 nn cecssdaszteccedecdcduvveieshsedadecbetesebadesl encesVededesddvaaderTesddedabevseau sevdes ty 285 x page jam clear manual feeder 250 ccccccccsssssssssnsceeceeceecessssssnsaeeceeceeeescesseusaeeseeeeseessessnaness 286 x page jam open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 4Yy XX cccccccccccccesssssssnsnaeaeeceeceeeessesees 287 x page jam open automatic feeder top Cover 28y XX csssscccceccssssssssssssnseeceeeescesesessseseeeeseeseesees 290 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 ceceeeeeseeeeees 291 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 cceeesessssseeeeeeees 292 TFOUBIESNOOUNG lt 5ceesscavucnesseusvcesssuvexeusneuseveskeoesteasiuen tecesbuestadvetoos adder vetedies2 90 Understanding the printer MeSSAES csccccccccceceeccssessssnsnsseecececcssessesnssaueseeseeesseseseeesausseeseeeeesseseeeess 296 Solving Printer PrODIOMS svc seeadesccseveiuels stad coos dase awade ee aaa de testes bebeaag A a Ieee neva saad e 315 SOWING Print pro ES vessisss cocssaZ ses ceived dh cs seco a ar a a ra ena a A aaea aai aea
355. specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray Notes Normal is the factory default setting e These options appear only if card stock is supported Understanding the printer menus Use Transparency Texture Smooth Normal Rough Recycled Texture Smooth Normal Rough To Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting 157 Labels Texture Smooth Normal Rough Vinyl Labels Texture Smooth Normal Rough Bond Texture Smooth Normal Rough Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting Envelope Texture Smooth Normal Rough Rough Envelope Texture Rough Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray Note Rough is the factory default setting
356. ss or shortcut number that you want to add or search the address book 5 Touch Done Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt type the e mail address gt Done 4 Touch Subject then type the e mail subject and then touch Done 5 Touch Message then type your message and then touch Done Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt type the e mail address gt Done gt Send as E mailing 116 3 Select the file type you want to send Note If you select Secure PDF then you will be prompted to enter your password twice 4 Touch v gt Send It Canceling an e mail e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding t
357. ssssosecssssseosessssosecsssosecsessssosessssosessssessese Z Statement OF Volat T e aa sca a a a a a a A DEAA E EES Rase 243 Erasing Volatile MEMO Ysiin o anaE NEEE EEE E Ee aE TE AEI NET 243 Erasing non volatile m mory ann n e eea e a aa e aa de dassviedetabhdasasisles ede dvenuendaehceste 244 Erasing printer hard disk MEMOTY ccccccesessssssceeceeceescesessseaeeceeceeceeceseseasaeeeceecesessesasausseeeeeeseeeeeeeeess 244 Configuring printer hard disk CncryPtion ccccccccccssssesssceeceececceecessecnsnsaeaeececeeeesessessnssaeeseeeeeeeseeaness 245 Finding printer security INFOFMATION cccceeeessssseeceeceeceececesesssaeseeceeceeceseesseseassusaeeseseeeussseesseseeeess 246 Maintaining the printer ssssssssssssseseosessscsssessosesseossssscosseseosessecsssesssse 247 Cleaning printer PANtS 22 2 renner e aa aa e aa E a aea EA a Craie Ta iiaee 247 Checking the status of parts and SUPPIICS cccccessssccceeceecessssneseeceeceesecssesensaeeeeeeesessesssnsaseeeeeeseeaeess 251 ONCEFING SU a 01 EL ET AR E EEE E EE EE E E EE 252 Contents 5 SLOMING SUP PIES sisne eae hada doesd cuts dues a ai dud e Ta Wii tedee diag AE S 254 Replacing supplie Siseron dese ceeesaiesssuzssaveannadacdecesiave sa cadecdee sora eessesedavaunrd ececanasdacsnebbadasives 255 Moving the printer 256 55 secs dacs ehosivegsde a a a doduach a a ada eu a date Seacaveeces 263 Managing the printer sssssesseossosessscssssecssos
358. string Remote Syslog Port 1 65535 Remote Syslog Method Normal UDP Stunnel Remote Syslog Facility 0 23 Log full behavior Wrap over oldest entries E mail log then delete all entries ee Specify whether audit logs are deleted Specify how audit logs are configured Notes Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and 183 remote syslog No is the factory default setting Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server No is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server Remote Syslog Port identifies the port over which the printer transmits logged events to a remote server Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to transmit logged events to a remote server Normal UDP is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses when sending events to the remote syslog server 4 is the factory default setting Log full behavior determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely fills its allotted memory Wrap over oldest entries is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 184 Use ae Configure Log continued Specify how audit logs are configured Admin s e mail address Notes 256 character string Digitally sign exports Admin s e mail address determines if adm
359. t Note 0 is the factory default setting 203 Understanding the printer menus Enable Color Fax Scans Off by default On by default Never use Always use Enable color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Faxes On Off Fax Receive Settings Use Enable Fax Receive On Off Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting To Allow the printer to receive fax jobs Note On is the factory default setting Enable Caller ID On off Display the caller ID information of an incoming fax Note On is the factory default setting Fax Job Waiting None Toner Toner and Supplies Rings to Answer 1 25 Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable resources Note None is the factory default setting Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job Note 3 is the factory default setting Auto Answer Yes No Set the printer to receive faxes automatically Note Yes is the factory default setting Manual Answer Code 0 9 Manually enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax Notes e 9 is the factory default setting This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone Auto Reduction On Off Paper Source Auto Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Sides Duplex Off On
360. t Send It Sending an e mail using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 Press then enter the shortcut number using the keypad and then touch aS Note To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add 4 Touch Send It E mailing 115 Sending an e mail using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt 4 gt type the name of the recipient gt Search 4 Touch the name of the recipient Note To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the addre
361. t PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point Enable Disable WPS Auto detection Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with Enable WPS uses Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method Disable Note Disable is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 171 Use aI Network Mode Specify the network mode BSS Type Notes Infrastructure Ad hoc e Infrastructure is the factory default setting This lets the printer access a network using an access point Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer Compatibility Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11b g Note 802 11b g n is the factory default setting 802 11b g n Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network AppleTalk menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt AppleTalk e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt AppleTalk Activate Enable or disable AppleTalk support Yes No Note No is the factory default setting View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name Note The Ap
362. t fax shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Understanding the printer menus 166 Use AK Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or hard disk Notes e Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 e Make sure that the memory card or hard disk is installed and working correctly Asset Report Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned into an asset database Event Log Summary Print a summary of logged events XQ Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Active NIC Allow the printer to connect to a network Auto Notes list of available network cards Auto is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed Standard Network or Network x menu Note Only active ports appear in this menu Use AK Energy Efficient Ethernet Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the Ethernet Enable network Disable Note Enable is the factory default setting PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a pr
363. t one page at a time Can you send or receive a fax ko The problem is solved Contact customer support Can receive but not send faxes Action Step 1 Check if the printer is in Fax mode From the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode and then send the fax Note The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type To use XPS use the regular faxing method Can you send faxes Mi Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Troubleshooting 355 Action Yes No Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Load the original document properly Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass Can you send faxes Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer Set up the shortcut number properly support e Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number that you want to dial Dial the telephone number manually Can you send faxes enn En eS eS Can send but not receive faxes Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 Check the tray or feeder If empty then load paper in the tray or feeder Can you receive faxes
364. t sending faxes and configuring the settings FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings Understanding the printer menus 237 Menu item Description Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality defects and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies Saving money and the environment 238 Saving money and the environment Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and t
365. t setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Shadow Detail 4to4 ADF Multi feed Sensor Off On 218 To Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once Note On is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Off Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Format PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps RTF rtf TXT txt PDF Settings PDF Version 1 2 1 7 A 1a A 1b PDF Compression Normal High Secure PDF Off On Searchable PDF Off On On Sharpness Specify the amount of sharpness of the scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default Ato4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify the file format Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Configure the PDF settings Notes e 1 5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version e Normal is the factory default se
366. taching cables 49 available internal options 27 avoiding jams 88 avoiding paper jams 268 B Bin Setup menu 163 blocking junk faxes 139 buttons printer control panel 15 buttons touch screen using 18 C cables Ethernet 49 USB 49 canceling a print job from a computer 99 from the printer control panel 98 canceling an e mail 116 cannot open Embedded Web Server 362 Card Copy setting up 23 card stock loading 75 tips 83 Cartridge low 88 xy 296 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 296 Cartridge very low x estimated pages remain 88 xy 296 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 296 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 296 382 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 296 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 297 changing output file type e mailing 115 Check tray x connection 297 checking an unresponsive printer 316 checking status of parts and supplies 251 checking the status of parts and supplies 251 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 265 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 265 cleaning exterior of the printer 247 scanner glass 248 cleaning the printer 247 Close door or insert cartridge 297 Close finisher rear door 297 Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job 2yy xx 297 Close rear door 298 Close top access cover 298 collate copy options 110 collati
367. te The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging unit The printer has detected a non Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts Use of third party supplies or parts may affect the performance reliability or life of the printer and its imaging components All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results if third party supplies or parts are used Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or associated components Warning Potential Damage Use of third party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage Damage caused by the use of third party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non genuine supplies or parts in your printer touch and hold x and the on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing If you do not want to accept these risks then remove the third party supply or part from your printer and then install a genuine Lexmark supply or part Note For the list of supported supplies see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 Try one or more of the following From the printer co
368. ter select Printer properties e For earlier versions select Properties 3 Navigate to the Configuration tab and then select Update Now Ask Printer 4 Apply the changes For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer and then select Options amp Supplies 2 Navigate to the list of hardware options and then add any installed options 3 Apply the changes Networking Notes e Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless network For information on installing the wireless network adapter see the setup sheet that came with the adapter e A Service Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Wi Fi Protected Access WPA and WPA2 are types of security used on a network Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network organize the following information before you begin Note If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers continue on to installing the printer e Avalid unique IP address for the printer to use on the network e The network gateway e The network mask e Anickname for the printer optional Note A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network You can choose to use the default printer nickname or assign a name that is easier for you to r
369. than the default Use cc bcc Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Understanding the printer menus FTP Settings menu Use Format PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps RTF rtf TXT txt PDF Settings PDF Version 1 2 1 7 A la PDF Compression Normal High Secure PDF Off On Searchable PDF Off On Specify the file format Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Configure the PDF settings Notes e 1 5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version e Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression e Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice 214 sr Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Color off On eee ee ee eee ee E S Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color Note On is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 215 Use To Resolution Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch dpi 75 dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setti
370. the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings 3 From the Other Settings column click Manage Shortcuts gt E mail Shortcut Setup 4 Typeaunique name for the e mail recipient and then type the e mail address If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 5 Click Add Creating an e mail shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address To create a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 2 Touch Subject then type the e mail subject and then touch Done 3 Touch Message then type your message and then touch Done 4 Adjust the e mail settings Note If you change the settings after the e mail shortcut has been created then the settings are not saved 5 Touch a 6 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct and then touch OK If the shortcut name is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information Notes The shortcut name appears in the E mail Shortcuts icon on the pr
371. the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel Install bin x Try one or more of the following Install the specified bin 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Install the specified bin Troubleshooting 302 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on e Cancel the print job e Reset active bin Install duplex Try one or more of the following Install the duplex unit 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Install the duplex unit 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Restart the printer e Cancel the current job e Reset the active bin Install Tray x Try one or more of the following e Install the specified tray 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Install the specified tray 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on e Cancel the print job e Reset the active bin Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing e Delete fonts macros and other data in the printer memory e Install additional printer memory Insufficient memory to collate job 3
372. the configuration file Notes When saving the configuration file you can type a unique file name or use the default name Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved e To import a configuration from a file click Import and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer Notes Before importing the configuration file you can choose to preview it first or load it directly Ifa timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the Web browser and then click Apply 3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications do the following a Click Settings gt Import Export b Do either of the following e To export a configuration file click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file e To import a configuration file do the following 1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File gt Choose File and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer 2 Click Submit Additional printer setup 27 Additional printer setup Installing internal options CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cor
373. the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source e Cancel the current job Load Manual Feeder with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing From the printer control panel touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray e Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing From the printer control panel touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray e Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size of paper From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing e From the printer control panel touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray e Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size pap
374. the factory default setting Landscape Understanding the printer menus 236 Margin Size Set the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes e 19 mm is the factory default setting e Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Do Not Print Print Note Print is the factory default setting Image menu Use To Auto Fit Select the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings Off for some images Invert Invert bitonal monochrome images On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scale the image to fit the selected paper size Anchor Top Left Notes Best Fit aa f Anchor Center e Best Fit is the factory default setting i i i e When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Fit Height Width Fit Height Fit Width Orientation Set the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape Help menu Print All Guides Prints all the guides Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings E mail Guide Provides information about sending e mails and configuring the settings Fax Guide Provides information abou
375. the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 297 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Cancel the print job Check tray x connection Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on If the error occurs a second time then 1 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Remove the indicated tray Reattach the tray uu FB WN Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet
376. the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on USB port x disabled 56 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Notes e The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message appears again then contact your system support person Solving printer problems e Basic printer problems on page 316 e Hardware and internal option problems on page 318 e Paper feed problems on page 321 Troubleshooting 316 Basic printer problems The printer is not responding Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Turn on the printer Make sure the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Step 2 Press the Sleep button Go to step 3 Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode to wake the printer from Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Step 3 Go to step 4 Plug one end of the Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the power cord into the other to a properly grou
377. to www lexmark com and then navigate to Support amp Downloads gt select your printer 2 Click the Manuals tab and then select Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide Maintaining the printer 247 Maintaining the printer Warning Potential Damage Failure to maintain optimum printer performance or to replace parts and supplies may cause damage to your printer Cleaning printer parts Cleaning the printer Note You may need to perform this task after every few months Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder Remove any dust lint and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum 4 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water and use it to wipe the outside of the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer 5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job Maintaining the printer 248 Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glas
378. tom paper type name 3 Touch Submit 4 Touch Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 3 Touch Submit Paper and specialty media guide 83 Paper and specialty media guide Notes e Make sure that the paper size type and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel e Flex fan and straighten specialty media before loading them The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser e For more inf
379. tomatic feeder top cover 2yy xx 312 Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 2yy xx 312 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx 312 Scanner maintenance required soon use ADF Kit 80 312 Serial option x error 54 313 Serial port x disabled 56 313 Some held jobs were not restored 313 Standard network software error 54 313 Index Standard USB port disabled 56 313 Supply needed to complete job 313 Too many bins attached 58 314 Too many disks installed 58 314 Too many flash options installed 58 314 Too many trays attached 58 314 Tray x paper size unsupported 314 Unformatted flash detected 53 315 Unsupported camera mode unplug camera and change mode 315 Unsupported disk 315 Unsupported option in slot x 55 315 Unsupported USB hub please remove 299 USB port x disabled 56 315 Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator 315 printer options troubleshooting internal option is not detected 318 internal print server 318 Internal Solutions Port 319 tray problems 319 USB parallel interface card 320 printer parts controller board 27 printer problems solving basic 316 printer security information on 246 printing canceling from the printer control panel 98 directory list 98 font sample list 98 forms 93 from a mobile device 96 from flash drive 94 from Macintosh 93 from Windows 93 menu settings page 56 network setup page 57 printing a dir
380. ts USB serial or Ethernet are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer Note For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer b Resend the print job Do the jobs print The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 4 Go to step 5 Step 5 a Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 6 a Remove and then reinstall the printer software For more information see Installing the printer on page 51 Note The printer software is available at http support lexmark com b Resend the print job Do the jobs print The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 6 Contact customer support Troubleshooting Print job takes longer than expected Action Step 1 Change the environmental settings of the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings b Select Eco Mode or Quiet Mode and then select Off Note Disabling Eco Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies or both Did the job print Step 2 Reduce the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job and then resend the job Did the job print Step 3 a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory b Rese
381. tting for PDF Compression This menu item appears only when a formatted working hard disk is installed e Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice Understanding the printer menus Use Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo aie Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting 219 Content Source Black White Laser Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Color On Off Resolution 75 dpi 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness 1 9 Specify how the original document was produced Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color Note On is the factory default setting Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Portrait Landscape Specify the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Difficult Media Letter Difficult Media A5 Difficult Media Legal Difficult Media A4 Custom Scan Size
382. u scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person After the destinations shared network folders have been established on the network the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server For more information see Setting up Scan to Network on page 24 Scanning to an FTP address Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer for example a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using the Embedded Web Server
383. uch as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt enter the number of copies gt Collate gt select the preferred order of pages gt ZS gt Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides Copying 107 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Separator Sheets Note Set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 to place separator sheets between copies If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job For more information see Collating copies on page 106 4 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages e Off 5 Touch Y gt Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive p
384. ue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 202 To Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specify the contrast in the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Negative Image Off On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 ADF Multi feed Sensor On off Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible Note 0 is the factory default setting Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once Note On is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of a fax 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default Ato4 while warm values generate a redder output than the defaul
385. unt of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the paper size and orientation before setting Lines per Page PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm Set the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting e The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters Understanding the printer menus Use PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF On Off PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR On Off 234 To Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Envelope Off None 0 199 Tray Renumber View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Notes e Off is the factory default setting None ignor
386. upplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces to stop working Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materia
387. ur system support person Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 Try one or more of the following Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen and then contact your system support person e Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job Note This attempts to enable the scanner Scanner jam open and close automatic feeder top cover 2yy xx Remove the jammed paper from the ADF cover Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 2yy xx Remove the jammed paper from the scanner Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx Remove the jammed paper from the scanner Scanner maintenance required soon use ADF Kit 80 Contact customer support and then report the message The printer is scheduled for maintenance Troubleshooting 313 Serial option x error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to continue printing Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port e Check that the serial interface parameters protocol baud parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and computer Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Serial port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received thr
388. urpose feeder 75 letterhead in trays 58 multipurpose feeder 75 optional 550 sheet tray 58 standard 550 sheet tray 58 transparencies 75 loading letterhead paper orientation 84 M maintenance kit ordering 252 Maintenance kit low 80 xy 305 Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy 305 Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy 305 making copies using paper from selected tray 103 memory types installed on printer 243 memory card 27 installing 31 Memory full 38 305 Memory full cannot print faxes 305 Memory full cannot send faxes 306 386 menu settings page printing 56 menus Active NIC 166 AppleTalk 171 Bin Setup 163 Confidential Print 181 Configure MP 152 Copy Settings 193 Custom Bin Names 162 Custom Names 161 Custom Scan Sizes 162 Custom Types 161 Default Source 152 diagram of 151 Edit Security Setups 179 Erase Temporary Data Files 182 E mail Settings 208 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 198 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 206 Finishing 226 Flash Drive 218 FTP Settings 214 General Settings 186 Help 236 HTML 235 Image 236 IPv6 170 Job Accounting 229 Miscellaneous Security Settings 180 Network x 166 Network Card 168 Network Reports 168 OCR Settings 224 Paper Loading 160 Paper Size Type 153 Paper Texture 156 Paper Weight 158 Parallel x 173 PCL Emul 232 PDF 231 PostScript 232 Quality 228 Reports 165 Security Audit Log 182 Serial x 175 Set Date Time 184 Settings 225 SMTP Setup 178 St
389. use gt ZS 5 Touch Copy It Copying different paper sizes Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying on mixed paper sizes 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Copying 104 Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt ZS 4 Navigate to Copy to gt Auto Size Match gt ZS gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Example 2 Copying on a single paper size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on th
390. ustration to locate the appropriate connector Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector Option card connector 3 Memory card connector Additional printer setup 5 Reattach the shield and then align the screws with the holes 6 Tighten the screws on the shield 30 Additional printer setup 31 7 Close the access cover Installing a memory card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 2 Unpack the memory card
391. ut number or use the address book You can also use the Multi Send Scan to Network or j MyShortcut application from the home screen For more information see Activating the home screen applications on page 22 Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt Done gt Send It Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Scanning 146 Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press on the keypad and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch ZS gt Send
392. ut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Faxing 138 Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcut Setup Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password then contact your system support person 3 Type a name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number Notes e To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group e Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon 4 Assign a shortcut number Note If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen touch Fax and then enter the fax number Note To create a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number o 2 Touch 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK Note If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information Customizing fax settings Changing
393. ve image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 222 Scan edge to edge Off On Sharpness Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default Ato4 while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting XX A Print Settings Use To Copies Specify a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Paper Source Tray x Manual Paper Multipurpose Feeder Manual Envelope Note 1 is the factory default setting Set a default paper source for all print jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Collate 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Staple Off On Hole Punch Off On Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting Enable two sided printing for incoming print jobs Note 1 sided is the factory default setting Specify whether prints are stapled Notes e Off is the factory
394. ver 362 checking an unresponsive printer 316 contacting customer support 363 fax and e mail functions are not set up 356 solving basic printer problems 316 the scanner does not respond 361 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 349 392 partial document or photo copies 349 poor copy quality 350 poor scanned image quality 358 scanner unit does not close 351 360 troubleshooting display printer display is blank 317 troubleshooting fax caller ID is not shown 352 can receive but not send faxes 354 can send but not receive faxes 355 cannot send or receive a fax 352 received fax has poor print quality 356 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 322 troubleshooting print envelope seals when printing 323 error reading flash drive 323 held jobs do not print 322 incorrect characters print 324 incorrect margins on prints 334 jammed pages are not reprinted 321 job prints from wrong tray 324 job prints on wrong paper 324 jobs do not print 326 Large jobs do not collate 325 multiple language PDF files do not print 325 paper curl 335 paper frequently jams 321 print job takes longer than expected 328 tray linking does not work 329 unexpected page breaks occur 329 troubleshooting print quality blank pages 335 characters have jagged edges 330 clipped pages or images 330 compressed images appear on prints 331 gray background on prints 332 horizontal voids appear on prints 333 print irregularities
395. wireless capability and is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Additional printer setup 57 Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected Ifthe statusisNot Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Loading paper and specialty media 58 Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 268 and Storing paper on page 88 Setting the paper size and type From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt ZS Configuring Universal paper settings Universal pap
396. xmark com e To use the fax option with the PostScript driver configure and enable it in the Configuration tab For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print 2 Select the printer 3 Enter the recipient fax number and then configure other fax settings if necessary 4 Send the fax job Sending a fax using a shortcut number Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine A shortcut number 1 999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad 4 Touch Fax It Faxing 137 Sending a fax using the address book The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers For more information on enabling the address book feature contact your system support person 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transpare
397. y 306 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 306 Paper changes needed 307 Parallel port x disabled 56 307 Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete 307 Reattach bin x 307 Reattach bins x y 308 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 308 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy 308 Remove defective disk 61 308 Remove packaging material area name 309 Remove paper from linked set bin name 309 Remove paper from all bins 309 Remove paper from bin x 309 389 Remove paper from standard output bin 309 Replace all originals if restarting job 309 Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy 309 Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy 309 Replace imaging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy 310 Replace jammed originals if restarting job 310 Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job 310 Replace maintenance kit 0 estimated pages remain 80 xy 311 Replace missing fuser 80 xx 311 Replace roller kit 81 xx 311 Replace separator pad 311 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 311 Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy 311 Replace wiper 311 Restore held jobs 312 Scan document too long 312 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 312 Scanner disabled by admin 840 01 312 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 312 Scanner jam open and close au
398. y default setting This setting resets the printer to its factory default settings Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded Note Enabled is the factory default setting Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once Note On is the factory default setting Minimize the printer noise Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Run Initial setup Yes No Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portugues Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkish Czech Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key x Paper Sizes U S Metric Scan to PC Port Range port range To Run the setup wizard Specify a language and custom key information for the display keyboard Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes Notes e U S is the factory default setting e The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting 187 Understanding the printer menus 188 Displayed Information Left side Right side Custom Text x Specify what is displayed on the upper corners of the home screen For Left side and Right side select fr

User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents